JP6672966B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A first member, a first first passage second member and the gaming machine having a that having a second passage in communication with the member is known that has a game board, a first passageway Yu technique sphere passes (Patent Document 1) .

JP 2012-5783 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of positioning a second member with respect to a first member.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a gaming board, a first means connected to the front of the gaming board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first means of the first means. A second passage having a second passage communicating with the passage, and a second means connected to a back surface of the game board, wherein a first engagement portion engaging with the first means and the second means are provided. And third means for positioning the second passage with respect to the first passage , wherein the first passage and the second passage are provided with a rolling member on which a game ball rolls. A moving surface, and a pair of side wall portions erected from an outer edge of the rolling surface in a direction orthogonal to a rolling direction of the rolling surface, and the second passage of the side wall portion in the first passage At the side end, at a position separated from the rolling surface by a radius of the game ball in a direction away from the second passage. A notch-formed recess is formed, and a protrusion protruding toward the first passage and disposed in the recess is formed at an end of the side wall in the second passage on the first passage side. The second engaging portion is connected between a pair of arms fitted outside the pair of side walls of the second passage and the arms, and the second engagement portion is connected to the side wall in the first passage. Ru and a placement portion which is disposed above the end of the second passage side of the rolling surface of the end portion and the first passage of the second passage side.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the second member can be positioned with respect to the first member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. FIG. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit as viewed from the rear in FIG. 19. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. FIG. 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit as viewed from the rear in FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. FIG. 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit as viewed from the rear in FIG. 23. It is a front view of a displacement unit in a 2nd mode. FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit as viewed from the rear in FIG. 25. It is a front view of a displacement unit in a 3rd mode. FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit as viewed from the rear in FIG. 27. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit. It is a front view of a back base. It is a rear view of a front base and an irradiation unit. It is a rear view of a front base. FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member, taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partial enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). 44A is a rear view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block taken along line XLVIb-XLVIb in (a) of FIG. 46, and (c) is a front view of the second block. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46C. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the up-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the up-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the up-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the up-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the up-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission at the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connection member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 55, and (c) is 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit, taken along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. FIG. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove along line LXb-LXb in FIG. It is a cross section of a formation member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. It is a cross section of a formation member. (A) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64 (a), and (b) is a projection plate along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member, a gear member, and a groove forming member, (c) is sectional drawing of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove forming member in LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is a partial enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in a 5th embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state where the front base and the irradiation unit were assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. It is a front view of a game board in a 7th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit, and a throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of a front unit, (b) is a rear view of a front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front unit. . (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG.93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 83. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective back view of specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit along the line CII-CII in FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit taken along the line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit along the line CVIa-CVIa in FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is a specific winning opening unit and the driving unit along the line CVIb-CVIb in FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of a drive unit. (A) is a front view of a throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of a distribution unit, (b) is a side view of a distribution unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting unit along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a sectional view of the sorting unit along CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are the elements on larger scale sectional drawing of the distribution unit in range CXIII of Drawing 112 (b). (A) is a front view of a passage unit, (b) is a side view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of an exchange unit, (b) is a rear view of an exchange unit. FIG. 117 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit along the line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit along the line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118 (a). FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board taken along line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. 81. 120A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in a range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIG. 120B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXb-CXXb in FIG. 120A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in a range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIG. 120B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXb-CXXb in FIG. It is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member in an 8th embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the drive unit and displacement member in 10th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in a 12th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb in FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of a drive unit in a 15th embodiment, (b) is a top view of a drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the game board in 16th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the eighteenth embodiment as viewed from the back, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the back, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb in FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the back, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137 (a).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 4 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. 5 and a lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 incorporates a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and is provided with a window part 5c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an upper surface open, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  The front door 5 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 5c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by the lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. At the upper left of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is regenerated according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is provided inside the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and vibrates. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of probable change, in a time saving operation, or in normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 has a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a state of a game in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily wins in the second winning opening 140. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in effect (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but the time during which the first motor-operated accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is also changed, and is longer than in normal times. The time is set. When the first motor-operated character 140a is in the open state (open state), the first electric auditors specialty 140a is directed to the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the first motor-operated character 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It is to be noted that, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Thus, a change may be made to increase the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened from the normal operation. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is opened once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened each time. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal pattern.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing symbol variation display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternates a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display for lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is turned off. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, during the probability change and during the working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  In addition, the second winning opening is also provided during the probability change or the time reduction, such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or the time reduction, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per one time. In a case where the ball can easily enter the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. May be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is mounted on the game board in a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to be able to pass a part of a ball flowing down the game board among the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 140 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also one of winning ports in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured to have three prize balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded, and to have five prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  The first winning combination 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is hard to enter the second winning opening 140. I have. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The ball is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it can easily win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probable change or during the time reduction, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened becomes longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 140 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first motor-driven accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball can be always won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140 a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. The ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to set the first electric accessory 140a in the open state and to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning port 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the pachinko machine 1 is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. It may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. You. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include respective drive motors 481, 491, 661, 880.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 have been respectively displaced to the retracted positions. And the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the extended positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively provided in the inner space of the rear case 300. Will be accommodated in order.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. One side (front side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 301a as viewed from the front is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The displacement unit 400 has a frame-shaped base member 410 in front view disposed on the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a displaceable member disposed on the base member 410. A projection member 485, and a retreat position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projection member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device). 81) can be displaced between the position and the overhanging position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485), By selecting a driving unit to be driven, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made different (a plurality of types of displacement modes can be formed). Details of such a structure will be described later.

  The projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection unit. A plurality of LEDs 651 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made visible to a player. When light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is converted into a pattern or the like. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern. That is, it is possible to make a pattern or design stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

  In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that increases the efficiency of incidence of light emitted from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 620, and enhances light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and patterns). Emerge clearly). In addition, a structure that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to base member 610 is employed. Details of these structures will be described later.

  The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed above the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 having one end rotatably supported by the base members 820 and 830. And the other end of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81) and a projecting position that projects toward the front. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP for urging the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 performs a reciprocating displacement (approximately a simple vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP about the balancing position (predetermined position). A structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

  Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement Member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive mechanism When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is displaced. When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (the second drive motor 491), the displacement member may be displaced in different modes. It is formed so as to kill. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R formed as displacement members that perform an effect by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R include , The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the bogie member 440, and the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

  The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connection shaft 421 protruding from the rear surface, a connection hole 422 formed in the upper end, and a slide formed in the lower end. And a dynamic groove 423. The connection shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connection hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the rear side of the left displacement member 420L.

  The connecting shaft 421 is set to have a length such that the front end thereof protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L. The protruding front end of the connecting shaft 421 is connected to the driving groove 494c (in the driving arm 494 of the upper driving mechanism 490). 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connection shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

  The connection hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connection shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted therein. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state where relative posture change (rotation about the axis of the connection hole 422 as the rotation center) with respect to the bogie member 440L is allowed.

  The slide groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of a lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted. . Therefore, in the case where only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410. Can be formed.

  The left driven member 430L is a member driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being erected between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and is a connection hole 431 formed at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 protruding from the rear surface.

  The connection hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The slide pin 432 is a pin (rod) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a slide groove 410 a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing its relative attitude with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

  The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion (the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It comprises two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of each of the connecting shafts 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) via the bogie member 440 by the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface. .

  The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing upward in the vertical direction, and the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 are placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the bogie member 440 and supported in a state.

  The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide portion extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion (the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and the two connection holes 451 through which the two connection shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 are rotatably inserted. And a rack gear 452.

  Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially left-right symmetric shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is formed with a left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is formed with an upper left rack 450L. And have substantially the same configuration, the same portions are denoted by the same reference characters and description thereof will be omitted.

  However, the rack gear 452 is engraved on the front of the upper right rack 450R. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is arranged so that the portion where the connection hole 451 is formed is offset to the front side, and the upper right rack 450R is positioned differently from the upper left rack 450L in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 meshes with both rack gears 452.

  Accordingly, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 provided between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the pinion gears 459 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are provided. The direction of displacement can be the opposite direction (the direction in which they approach or separate from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 provided may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

  Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive units (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. 13 and 14 show a state where the rear cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state where the rear cover 412 is removed. 13 to 16, illustration of the raised cover 413 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to a drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive that meshes with the pinion gear 482. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and the rack gear 486 The gear train mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) meshed with the first gear 487a, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R meshed with the last gear 487e of the gear train.

  The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back of the left front cover 411L. You. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front of the base member 410.

  The drive gear 483 includes an eccentric pin 483a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the rear surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, A drive pin 484c protruding from the front at an end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the slide groove 484b are formed is provided.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first driving motor 481, the eccentric pin 483 a of the driving gear 483 moves from the sliding groove 484 b of the driving arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted on, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction around the shaft support hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

  The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed on the front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is disposed in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction extends along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base rail provided on the front of the base member 410, a tip rail provided on the back of the protruding member 485, and a base rail interposed between the base rail and the tip rail. And an intermediate rail that enables the end rail and the end rail to be relatively displaceable in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the slide groove 485a of the protruding member 485 is pushed up or down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the protruding member 485 is mounted on the base. The member 410 is vertically moved up and down.

  The rack gear 486 is engraved along the elevating direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487 a to 487 e) has the front gear 487 a meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front and right front of the base member 410. Each is rotatably supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated using the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

  The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, and a rack gear 488a engraved on a side surface along a longitudinal direction thereof, and a drive pin 488b protruding from a front end at a longitudinal end. Respectively. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are positioned differently in the vertical direction, and in a state where the rack gears 488a are opposed to each other, a horizontal direction (width direction) is set between the rear surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the rear cover 412. 19 (right and left direction in FIG. 19).

  The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d, and protrudes rearward through an opening 410b formed in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488L. The rack 488R is meshed with each rack gear 488a. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated with the elevation of the protruding member 485, the rotation of the last gear 487a causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to mutually move. The linear motion can be performed in opposite directions (directions that approach each other or separate from each other).

  As described above, the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrude to the front side through the linear insertion grooves 410c formed in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. And, it is rotatably and slidably inserted into the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are linearly moved, so that the lower ends (the sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the bogie member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

  Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive units (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to a drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive in which the pinion gear 492 meshes. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism with the drive gear 493.

  The base member 410 has an upper portion (an upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape in a front view) formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper middle portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially stacked on the front side. Is done.

  The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of the portion that protrudes upward from the upper intermediate portion 410f, and a pinion gear is attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 that protrudes from the back of the protruding portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the rear surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

  The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, A linear drive groove 494c is provided at an end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the slide groove 494b are formed.

  Accordingly, when the driving gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second driving motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the driving gear 493 moves to the sliding groove 494b of the driving arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted on, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction about the shaft support hole 494a as a rotation center, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced left and right.

  As described above, the distal end of the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, the drive arm 494 is driven (rotated about the shaft support hole 494a), and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c that is displaced left and right acts on the connection shaft 421, so that the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right.

  In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is rolled on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L is connected to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. 19 is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19), and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member is moved. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 roll are formed in an upper intermediate portion 410f and an upper front portion 410g.

  Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to displace the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). A first mode of displacing will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first mode. FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

  19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 correspond to the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R. And the protruding member 485 corresponds to the state where the protruding member 485 is disposed at the overhang position in the first mode.

  As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, in the state where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost positions (positions where they are most separated from each other in the left-right direction). The protruding member 485 is disposed at the lowermost position.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, respectively, the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is passed, and then shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. Until the state (extended position in the first mode), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in directions approaching each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is raised. In the extended position in the first mode, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are in a united state (a state in which the three sides are in close contact with each other).

  Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is moved to the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. The protruding member 485 is raised by pushing up the inner wall surface (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  When the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15A and 15B). 16), the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, whereby the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching each other along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410.

  On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is connected to the connection shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421. Thereby, the bogie member 440 is rolled on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Further, when the upper end side (trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R is displaced. The upper end side (cart member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  In the present embodiment, the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is smaller at the lower end than at the upper end ( That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the bogie member 440 (extended length of the driven surface).

  In this case, the lower end and the upper end of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacing almost simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the projecting position ( 23 and 24), the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven. That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (bogie member 440) is made higher than the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

  Accordingly, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in the left-right direction without rotating while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace while rotating the posture in this way with the configuration in which the displacement member slides along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. It has become possible for the first time to use the driving means.

  When the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (bogie member 440) is lower than the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the bogie member 440 is changed. Since the dynamic groove 423 has a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, a change in the distance between the two can be absorbed. In other words, there is no need to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the driving pin 488b may be formed so as to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the operation reliability and durability are improved. be able to.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions from the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, respectively, FIGS. After passing through the state shown in FIG. 19, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left / right direction (width direction) so as to be separated from each other until the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. Is lowered.

  Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is kept in a non-drive state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the second embodiment, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 as viewed from the rear in FIG. FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended positions in the second mode.

  Here, in the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (the state arranged at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates the upper end side (the axis of the connection hole 422) of the left displacement member 420L. It is arranged in a posture that allows rotation about the center. That is, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

  Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. When the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485 is pushed up by the 484c, the protruding member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved by the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their upper ends (the axis of the connection hole 422) as the center of rotation.

  Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (the second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (the first drive motor 481) is kept in a non-drive state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the third embodiment, FIG. 19 and FIG.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 as viewed from the rear in FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended positions in the third mode.

  Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

  Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (the state where it is located at the retracted position), as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the 494 is acted on the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (cart member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (bogie member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

  That is, in the third embodiment, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the center of rotation. In the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the guide member (for example, a guide groove) is extended from the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide member. The displacement mode of the member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. For this reason, the effect by the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, a driving motor) is varied depending on the strength, only the displacement speed of the displacement member increases / decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprisingly comes out of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state is selected (changed). Accordingly, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485) can be displaced in three types (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike a conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three types of displacement modes. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

  In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can cause the dominant displacement by the parallel movement (linear motion), while the second mode. In the third mode (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion). Can be made. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform a surprising effect of the player.

  In this case, in the conventional product, there is a configuration in which the rotation center is kept constant and only the rotation direction is changed, so that the displacement mode is changed. However, the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are different from each other. However, not only the same rotation center but the rotation direction is different, but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also different (in the second mode, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third mode). In this case, the lower end side is set as the center of rotation), and the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, thereby making it easier for the player to produce a surprising effect.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear movement). In the same direction as the direction of rotation at. Therefore, in the initial stage of the first mode and the third mode (for example, see FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so that the displacement members are displaced in the approaching direction. Can be made difficult. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the protruding member 485 is raised in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the approaching direction, whereas in the third embodiment, the protruding member 485 is stopped. State can be maintained. That is, in the initial stage in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in directions approaching each other, if the protruding member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. That the player expects.

  In the displacement unit 400, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R are respectively disposed (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the bogie member 440 is provided with a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R. Are connected rotatably, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

  Accordingly, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion (first mode) including a rotation component and a rotary motion (second and third modes). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove. However, when the slide member is slid along such a curved trajectory, a complicated structure is required ( In other words, if the locus is curved, not only a mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the bogie member 440 and the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It is necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply the driving force to the 488L and 488R).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in a linear direction, and therefore, the bogie member 440 may be guided by a flat rolling surface. , The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, so that their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and to improve durability and operation reliability.

  Further, according to the displacement unit 400, a mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. One end (upper end) of each of the displacement members 420L and 420R is guided by the bogie member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end (lower end) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack. 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms for each mode, and therefore, it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the operation reliability and durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 in a front view, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection unit 620. A plurality of irradiation units 650 disposed around the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a drive force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 620; Gear trains (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 610 includes an annular rear base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed in front of the rear base 611, and is formed between opposing surfaces of the rear base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

  Note that, in a region inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, referred to as a “display region”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and the region outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. The projection plate member 620 is made invisible to the player (that is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as “outside the display area”).

  The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the player to visually recognize the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side and irradiate the light from the irradiation unit 650. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form of a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by a player. That is, it is possible to make a pattern or design stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

  A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 on the rear side and the front side, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in a front view, and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

  A plurality of teeth are engraved on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the last gear 664 of the gear train is meshed. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section which is continuous in the circumferential direction between the projection plate member 620 and the plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. The projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the C to the guide groove 641. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

  The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for allowing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (facing the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in the present embodiment) are arranged in postures. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the posture is such that the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 passes through substantially the center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

  The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and the first gear 662 of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. A gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 meshes with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

  Next, a holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rear base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a standing on the inner edge of the annular plate member and an outer standing portion 611a standing on the outer edge of the annular plate member. 611c, an intermediate erected portion 611b erected from between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner erected portion 611b and the inner erected portion 611a. 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulating protrusion 611f projecting from the annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

  The inner erected portion 611a is erected from the inner edge of the annular plate member toward the front (on the front side in FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

  The outer erected portion 611c is erected from the outer edge of the annular plate member toward the front (on the front side in FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

  The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. In addition, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by being divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

  The inner concave groove 611d is a region for arranging an outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 described later inside, and surrounds three directions of the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b. Formed.

  The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650 described later inside, and is formed so as to surround three directions of the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b. You.

  The regulating protrusion 611f is a protrusion that suppresses the backlash of the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of a hole opened in the axis of the collar C. As well as protruding from the front side. Note that, in the present embodiment, the regulating protrusions 611f are formed at six locations at a predetermined interval.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the rear surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portion 611a, the intermediate standing portion 611b, the outer standing portion 611c, and the regulating protrusion 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. The erected portion 612a, the intermediate erected portion 612b, the outer erected portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in a state where the base member 610 is assembled, the standing end surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are superimposed on the standing end surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the regulating protrusion 611f.

  A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the rear surface of the front base 612, in a region between the middle erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g have a circular cross-section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

  The irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651 as described above, and is a unit for causing light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Will be arranged. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded on its outer peripheral side by the plurality of irradiation units 650.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 and between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612. Thus, the bases 611 and 612 are housed between the opposing surfaces (internal space).

  FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout 612b1 is formed in the middle standing portion 612b of the front base 612 at the leading end side thereof. Similarly, a notch 611b1 having a substantially semicircular shape is cut out at a position of the same phase as the notch 612b1 also on the front end side of the middle upright portion 611b of the rear base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

  That is, in a state where the standing end surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, the assembled state of the base member 610), the substantially notched portions 611b1 and 612b2 form substantially circular openings in front view. You. These circular openings are formed at positions facing the respective LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

  Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Is done. The diameter of the circular opening is set to be larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

  Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate shape having a circular shape in a front view. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 at a part of the outer edge, and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

  The notch portion 621 is a portion for easily arranging the collar C on the regulating protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by notching a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line perpendicular to the radial direction. Is done.

  The reflecting portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern over the entire region of the projection plate member 620 in a front view. Thus, when the light that has entered the inside of the projection plate member 620 irradiates the reflecting portion 622, the light is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the game board.

  As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the irregularly reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmissive material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed from an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter dimension smaller than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set to be large and disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). The gear member 630 is arranged on the back side (the back side in FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 includes a tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, a rear surface portion 632 on a rear side surface, and a front surface inclined from an inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the rear surface portion 632. And an inclined surface portion 633 to be provided.

  The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface on which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

  The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and that is inclined toward the front side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 633 to the front side is the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the rear portion 632, and the rear portion 632 is extended to the inner peripheral side. The intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set to be substantially the same (θ1 = θ2).

  The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and has a bent inner side. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. The groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the rear side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The groove forming member 640 includes a side surface portion 641a on one surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a front side surface. A front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 that is inclined rearward from the inner peripheral end (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 are provided.

  The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the front surface (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620 and the front surface of the projection plate member 620. They are formed separately.

  The contact surface 641b is a surface that comes into contact with the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 so as to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

  Therefore, the guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C can be formed by arranging the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b on the projection plate member 620. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

  The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and that is inclined to the rear side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the rear side is a virtual angle in which the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 extends the front portion 642 toward the inner peripheral side. The intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set to be substantially the same (θ3 = θ4).

  Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39A is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39A. FIGS. 40A to 40C are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. Note that FIGS. 40A to 40C illustrate transition states when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. 39 and 40 show a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protrusion C1 protruding radially outward is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39 (b) (the lower side) and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 (the guide groove 641).

  The distance L1 between the distal end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 is larger than the distance L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

  Therefore, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, the projection plate member 620 moves in the vertical and horizontal directions by the gap. , The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can contact the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

  Next, attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft 612f, it is performed in a state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

  Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by disposing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by disposing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

  Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated, and the notch 621 of the projection plate member 620 is displaced toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the position of the cutout portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be arranged on the front base 612 where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

  Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the rear side (the upper side in FIG. 40A) is the inner circumferential side (the left side in FIG. 40A) with respect to the axis of the collar C with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state of being tilted. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the cutout portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

  From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated frontward (downward in FIG. 40 (b)) around the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), by displacing the collar C to the front side (downward in FIG. 40 (c)), the contact surface between the leading end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 is brought into contact. It is arranged at a position where the surface faces. Thereafter, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

  Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to arrange the collar. There is a problem that it is necessary to arrange the collars, and the efficiency of the assembling is low because both hands are used for assembling.

  On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when disposing the collar C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

  The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the rear base 611 from the rear side of the projection unit 600 thus assembled.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 41A to 43B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), illustration of the cross-sectional lines is omitted for easy understanding.

  41B, FIG. 42B, and FIG. 43B, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is different from that of FIG. Light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated as being orthogonal to the invention, assuming that the invention is not affected. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the above-described display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having the irradiation angle α for irradiating the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is transmitted to the projection plate member 620 by the outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light that has entered the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41B).

  In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or rear side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmitting material of the projection plate member 620, the projection plate is formed. The light traveling through the member 620 irradiates the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620.

  That is, when light passing through a medium having a high refractive index travels to a medium having a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light is totally reflected without being incident on a medium having a low refractive index. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from an end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light is not incident from the projection plate member 620 to the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending ratio, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and the air is such that the refractive index of the air is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transparent material (refractive index 1), so that the air travels inside the projection plate member 620. Light is not incident from the projection plate member 620 into the air (atmosphere), and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having the irradiation angle β for irradiating the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Is done.

  The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

  That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light applied to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, in a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is irradiated with light because the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light transmitting material having a lower refractive index than that of the light transmitting material. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected on the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel in the same manner as the light having the irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description is omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be irregularly reflected by the reflection section 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to change the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or to increase the intensity (light amount) of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without increasing the intensity (light amount) of light emitted from the LED 651. it can.

  That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, of the light emitted from the light source A, the light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, and the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. By increasing the amount of characters, patterns and patterns can be clearly displayed (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the rear side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 640, and the appearance is correspondingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is different from the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A in that the groove forming member 640 is in front of the light source A (in the front direction (FIG. 42A)). ), The incident angle of light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on the inner side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 has the same intersection angle θ4 as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be advanced along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light at the irradiation angle β is projected onto the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected to the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Further, since the outer diameter of groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of projection plate member 620, irradiation angle β from light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected on the outer edge of the groove forming member 640 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle γ irradiating the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

  The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, since the gear member 630 is adjacent to the air (contacts with the atmosphere), the light applied to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, in the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The projected light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 like the light at the irradiation angle α, and is advanced toward the axis of the projection plate member 620. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description is omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflection section 622, and is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

  That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, As a result, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be improved. Therefore, of the light emitted from the light source A, the light reaching the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, and thus the amount of light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. Can be increased to make patterns and patterns clearly appear (display). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the rear side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gear member 630, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is different from the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A in that the gear member 630 is in the rear direction with respect to the light source A (downward in FIG. 43A). , The incident angle at the time of irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on the side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and (A state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

  Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 has the same intersection angle θ2 as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end 634, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be reflected. The area reflected by the projection plate member 620 can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected to the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Further, since the outer diameter of gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of projection plate member 620, irradiation angle β from light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected on the outer edge of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and a structure for attaching the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). FIG. 45A is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 45B is a diagram illustrating the irradiation unit 650 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. FIG. Note that FIGS. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (the front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of LEDs 651, a board member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a back surface of the board member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first block 653 and second block 654 are provided.

  The board member 652 is formed in a band shape that is horizontally long in a front view from a material that can be elastically deformed. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting unit that emits light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are arranged in a longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652. (FIG. 44 (b) left and right directions) and are arranged at equal intervals.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are disposed at the longitudinal center of the substrate member 652. In addition, second blocks 654 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are less likely to be elastically deformed) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (the front base 612), only the portion of the board member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653, 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 46A is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46B is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along the line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. FIG. 46C is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46C.

  The first block 653 is composed of a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally-long rectangular shape in front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (see FIG. 46A). The front side is formed in an open box shape.

  Of the four side wall portions 653b, the opposing side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h formed in a front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

  The second block 654 includes a rectangular bottom wall portion 654a in a front view and a side wall portion 654b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side (FIG. 46 (c), front of the drawing). Side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 654a1 is formed in the bottom wall 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted therethrough.

  Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b rising from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a has a fastening hole h formed in the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. The side wall portions 653b standing from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connection wall 654c, and the connection wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h at an end face on the front side thereof, and a screw S1 is formed. Can be fastened.

  In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are drilled at two locations on side walls 653b and 654b, respectively, standing from the long sides of the bottom walls 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. This makes it possible to position the positions of the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold the positions at the positions.

  The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A) (that is, a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h). In addition, it is formed in a shape that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 46A) and is symmetrical with respect to a second virtual plane perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

  Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which the two first blocks 653 are provided for one substrate member 620, the first block 653 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be. Further, when assembling the first block 653 to the board member 620, since the first block 653 has neither the vertical direction nor the longitudinal direction with respect to the board member 620, the workability at the time of assembling work is improved. Can be achieved.

  Similarly, the second block 654 is oriented with respect to a first imaginary plane (that is, an imaginary plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46C). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

  Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are provided for one substrate member 620, the second block 654 can be shared, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be. Further, when assembling the second block 654 to the board member 620, since the second block 654 does not have any vertical directionality with respect to the board member 620, workability at the time of assembly work is improved. Can be.

  Returning to FIGS. 44 and 45, the description will be continued. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the board member 652, respectively, with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 and with a predetermined interval between adjacent blocks. You.

  More specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 have their front surfaces superimposed on the back surface of the substrate member 652, and a screw S1 inserted from an insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. As a result, the base member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear side. In this case, the projection 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the board member 652 to the front side.

  Only the LED 651 is provided (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are provided (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with an open front, and the open side is disposed so as to overlap the rear surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both the blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a concave portion on the surface on which the substrate member 652 is superimposed (disposed), electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652 are provided in the concave portion (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by the blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the surrounding displaceable member (for example, the projection plate member 620) from coming into contact with the electronic component and the connector from being damaged. it can.

  The circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface. Therefore, since such a circuit can be covered and protected by the blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the surrounding displaceable member (for example, the projection plate member 620) from abutting, thereby preventing the circuit from being damaged (disconnected). it can. The portion of the board member 652 where both the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the rear side (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. This can prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) even in a portion where both blocks 653 and 654 are not provided.

  An arrangement method (assembly method) of the irradiation unit 650 thus configured to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612, in a region between the middle standing portion 611b and the outside standing portion 612c. In this case, while the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent), the holding pins 612g standing from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

  Thereby, both blocks 653, 654 (that is, irradiation unit 650) are held on the back surface of front base 612, and the arrangement position of irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (the internal space) of the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is provided (assembled) on the base member 610.

  In the present embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is provided on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are provided on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the other. Is done.

  Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. The arrangement (attachment) of the LEDs 651 is not only large, but also the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 is adjusted to the attitude toward the center of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 is disposed. Must be performed, and the labor of the installation work increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 which is formed to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650) By disposing (attaching) them to the front base 612 (base member 610), the disposing work of a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the labor of arranging the LEDs 651 can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the rear base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). In other words, there is no need to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while individually adjusting the irradiation surfaces of the LEDs 651. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), the work of arranging (attaching) the LEDs 651 can also be suppressed from this point.

  In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and both of the blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back base 612. By suppressing the warpage or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of the external force, or by correcting the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, the posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily specified to a desired posture. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 is suppressed from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and its orientation can be easily maintained.

  In particular, each LED 651 is disposed in a region of the board member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is disposed (that is, inside a region surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in a front view). Is established. Therefore, the warpage or bending of the board member 652 due to an external force input such as vibration can be easily suppressed, or the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself can be easily corrected, so that the posture of the board member 652 becomes a desired posture. Can be easily defined. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warpage or bending of the board member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. Can be easier.

  Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the rear surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be made closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

  Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 (the left-right direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal circumferential intervals on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed in two places is formed in the connection wall 654c in the second block 654, the length of the second block 654 in the longitudinal direction is correspondingly increased. Can be shortened. The second block 654 is disposed on the board member 652 in such a manner that the side wall portion 653b where the fastening hole h is formed is set to the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b where the fastening holes h are not formed are located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

  Thereby, the LEDs 651 are arranged at regular intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (FIG. 44 and FIG. ) Can be shortened, and a space (space) can be provided between the adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be provided using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed in two places are formed in the connection wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. That is, the position where the board member 652 is fastened and fixed to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, the effect of the warpage or bending of the board member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration can be less likely to act on the LED 651, and the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself can be particularly easily corrected near the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. Can be easier.

  In this case, in the first block 653, since the interval between the two fastening holes h is increased, the constraint of the substrate member 652 between the two fastening holes h may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connection wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b where the fastening holes h are formed, and the protrusion 653c1 projecting from the connection wall 653c is inserted into the insertion hole formed in the board member 652. Insert through the hole. Therefore, by the engagement of the projection 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warpage or bending of the board member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined to a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1 and the number of components can be reduced, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost, and the orientation can be further improved. It can be easier to maintain.

  Since both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (outermost parts in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, not restricted by the second block 654), the longitudinal direction is not limited. The posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may be unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the board member 652, and the board member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction where the center of the arc is located on the front side. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can be applied as a force in the direction of pressing the rear surfaces at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 can be stabilized.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rectangular back base 830 in front view, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the back base 830, and a rear side of the back base 830. A driving motor 880 to be disposed, a displacement member 850 rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 880 with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 880 to the displacement member 850 860, a coupling member 870 that couples the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and that is attached to the front base 820. .

  The rear base 830 has an opening 831 formed to have a size through which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted, and protrudes from respective axes of the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 to be formed, and a rear-side regulating portion 834 protruding from the front side and extending in a curved shape.

  The shaft of the drive motor 880 attached to the rear side of the rear base 830 is inserted into the opening 831. Thus, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

  The opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thus, when the transmission gear 861 is broken, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work steps for replacing parts when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

  The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 described later, respectively, and are formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the rear base 830 to the front side.

  The rear-side restricting portion 834 is a projection that restricts displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the rear direction (the depth direction on the paper of FIG. 47), protrudes from the front side of the rear base 830, and is connected to the connecting member 870 described later. It is extended in a curved shape along the displacement.

  The front base 820 is formed in an oblong rectangular shape in a front view having a slightly larger outer shape than the rear base 830. The front base 820 includes a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side to the back side (from the near side to the back side in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 that stands upright at the back side edge, and protrudes to the back side. Mainly includes a projection 823 that protrudes from the rear side, a front-side restricting portion 824 that protrudes to the rear side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes to the rear side.

  The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 described later is inserted, and is recessed below the front base 820 on the right side in front view.

  The side wall 822 is a wall for forming a gap for disposing a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870 described below between the rear base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is larger than the size and is provided upright on the front base 820 and on the left and right (other than the lower end) edges. Thus, when the front base 820 and the rear base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be disposed in a displaceable state therebetween.

  The protrusion 823 is a protrusion with which one end side (the upper side in FIG. 48) of an urging spring SP to be described later is engaged. The protrusion 823 is formed in a columnar shape and protrudes from the rear side of the front base 820.

  The front-side restricting portion 824 is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side in FIG. 47), protrudes from the front side of the front base 820, and follows the displacement of the connecting member 870. It is extended in a curved shape.

  The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall that is disposed adjacent to and at a predetermined distance from an urging spring SP, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude rearward from the lower end of the front base 820.

  The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted through the transmission gears 861 and 862 by being meshed with each other in series. Is transmitted to

  The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a meshed with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b connected to the connecting member 870, a protruding portion 863c protruding in an arc around the shaft, and a rotational position thereof. And a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the pressure.

  The tooth portion 863a is an engagement surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, so that the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

  The shaft portion 863b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870. The shaft portion 863b protrudes in a columnar shape on the rear side, and the shaft is disposed at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

  The projecting portion 863c is a projection for preventing the connecting member 870 from being displaced in the front direction. The projecting portion 863c is formed so as to project from an outer edge portion on the rear side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to be curved in a circular shape.

  The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks a detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base for detecting the rotation position of the transmission gear 863, and has a tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 formed thereon. It is formed so as to protrude radially outward on the side that is not formed.

  The connection member 870 is a member that transmits the driving force of the rotation of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed to be curved in a substantially C shape in a front view, and is attached to one end of the curved shape (the upper end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction. A gear-side connection hole 871 penetratingly formed, a displacement-side connection hole 872 penetratingly formed at the other end of the curved shape (the lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and an abutment formed to protrude upward from the outside of the curved portion. A part 873.

  The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft 863b. Thus, the transmission gear 863 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

  The displacement side connection hole 872 is a through hole into which a shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Accordingly, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

  The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed between the opposing ends of the rear regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. Is done.

  Further, the abutment portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction of the tip slightly smaller than a distance dimension between the opposing surfaces of the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back side regulating portion 834 and the front side regulating portion 824, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced is large. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the rear base 830.

  The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle in front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a pivotally supporting portion 841 that is concavely formed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

  The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (pins) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890, and a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Formed. Thus, since the pin member 890 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it is possible to prevent the pin member 890 from dropping from the vertical displacement unit 800.

  The displacement member 850 is a member having a decoration on the front side, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in a front view. The displacement member 850 includes a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 that transmits the driving force of the connecting member 870.

  The shaft hole 851 is a through-hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted as described above, and is formed to penetrate in one end side of the displacement member in the front-rear direction, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Are also formed large. Therefore, when the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851 and the pin member 890 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, the displacement member 850 is disposed. In addition, the displacement member 850 can be disposed in front of the front base 820 so as to be rotatable about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

  The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (the lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the rear side of the displacement member 850. Also, when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding rearward from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820, and the protruding distance is set to the front side of the rear base. Is formed up to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is constantly biased upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

  As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870, and is lower than the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820 (FIG. 50). A projection is formed at the position of (lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

  As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a metal rod having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. Thereby, when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the rotating shaft from being damaged.

  In addition, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two parts, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged due to an increase in resistance at one location.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is. FIGS. 54 to 56 show a state in which the back base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in a state in which the other end side (the left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the ascending (first position), the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed above. As a result, the shaft 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed above, so that the posture in which the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

  In the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b is connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

  Therefore, in the first position, a state where the force component in the direction in which the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated (that is, a dead center) can be formed. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the first position, the play of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the states shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, the drive motor 880 is driven to rotate, and each of the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (the transmission mechanism 860) is rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed down with the rotation of the shaft 863b. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side (the lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft 853 of the displacement member 850, and rotate the displacement member 850.

  In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the displacement between the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement of the connecting member 870 are made. The straight line connecting the side connection holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the state where the displacement component 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 can be released (that is, the dead center). As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts rotating in the rotation direction (right rotation in FIG. 54) that displaces the displacement member 850, the force of pulling the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 increases. , In a direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, it is possible to reduce the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 during the displacement from the first position.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state where it is located at the dead center), supply of power to the drive motor 880 is performed. A description will be given of a case where is turned off.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where the supply of power to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis of the transmission gear 863 (the center of rotation) and the axis of the transmission gear 863 The gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP are at a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal. The force is balanced (intermediate position).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described below, the supply of power to the drive motor 880 is turned off, so that the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). It is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform reciprocal displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be an orthographic motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can perform an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to apply a driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the above-described displacement (orthogonal motion of constant velocity circular motion) is different. In this aspect, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the displacement variation can be increased accordingly. That is, only by turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply a drive force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, variations in displacement can be increased, and the structure and control can be improved. Since there is no need to increase the complexity, it is possible to reduce product cost and improve reliability.

  Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the action of the gravity of the displacement member 850 is performed. When the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocal displacement by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP and the biasing spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (the left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the vertical linear motion. Rotational movement about the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation can also be a combined displacement. As a result, the displacement member 850 can perform an interesting displacement.

  In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863. Since the attitude of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be changed, and the displacement member can perform an interesting displacement.

  Further, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are balanced. Since the straight line connecting the axis and the straight line connecting the axis of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the axis of the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the force in the push-pull direction is reduced. The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the balancing position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any of the pushing and pulling directions from the balancing position. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balance position. Can be easily continued.

  When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55 and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (the transmission mechanism 860) are further rotated, the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced. Therefore, the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft 863b is further pushed down with the rotation of the shaft 863b. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in a state where the other end side (the left side in FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is located at the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is located below. The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft 863b is disposed below. Accordingly, the shaft 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed below, so that the displacement member 850 can be in a posture of being pushed down.

  In the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is connected to the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side of the connecting member 870. The straight line connecting the axes of the holes 872 is arranged with the same straight length.

  Therefore, at the second position, a state can be formed in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 (that is, a dead center). As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the second position, the play of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the second position. 57 (a) to 57 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

  Therefore, at the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 be stopped so that the displacement member 850 is disposed above and the third symbol display device 81 is in a retracted state in which the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81. However, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (b) and FIG. 57 (c), a state where power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is In a state in which the driving range θ6 is being driven), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the transmission gear 863 and the back base 830 can be increased, and the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be reduced.

  Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 be displaced in a short time in front of the third symbol display device 81. The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), at the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

  Here, when a vertically displaced displacement member is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displaced member is added to the inertial force at the time of the stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can cause the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 to contact the transmission gear 863. Are stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863, and when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving of the drive motor 880) is stopped. Can be distributed in one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displacing from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). FIGS. 58A to 58C are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. 58 (a) to 58 (c) show a transition state from the first position. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced in the first drive range θ5, the second position is shifted from the first position to the second position. As the position is shifted to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

  Therefore, when rotating the transmission gear 863 from the first position, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced in accordance with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

  Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacement member 850 to the first position of the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to a position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped.

  That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stop state due to the inertial force for stopping the operation. However, the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, so that the stop state is quickly formed. can do.

  On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced in the second drive range θ6, the state is such that the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Can be formed, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of projection of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

  Also, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released to cause the displacement member 850 to perform a reciprocating displacement centered on the intermediate position (balance position), the protrusion is provided. The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly, avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

  Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the rear base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59A is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59B is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. FIG. 59C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the rear side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830. Placed in

  That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the rear-side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. Thereby, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is regulated.

  Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state where the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are inclined in the front-rear direction by the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connection hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

  On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from being inclined in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59C, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear-side regulating portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. May not be arranged.

  Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 at the second position and the front base 820 and the back base 830 can be increased. As a result, resistance at the time of displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

  Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is substantially on a straight line connecting the axis of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axis of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the opposite side of the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with respect to the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles against the front base 820 and the rear base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the rear base 830, and thereby the shaft of the transmission gear 863. The inclination of the gear side connection hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connection member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. However, in the second embodiment, the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620 is smaller. The outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are set to be the same.

  First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 60A is a front view of a projection plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60B is a projection along line LXb-LXb in FIG. It is a cross section of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

  As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620 on the rear side and the front side, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate shape in a front view, and has the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. In addition, the projection plate member 2620 includes a cutout portion 621 at a part of the outer edge, and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

  The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light transmissive material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and is formed in a U-shape whose cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. Guide groove 2641 is provided. The groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the rear side of the front base 612).

  The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C inward, and has a concave width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 are guided by the guide grooves 2641, so that the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b), and FIG. 63 (b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for easy understanding.

  Also, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b) and 63 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. The angle of refraction at this time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a state of being orthogonal. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle α2 which irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is transmitted to the projection plate member 620 by the outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light that has entered the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the center (axial center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflector 622, and is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

  In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount (light amount) of light projected on the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation for irradiating the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641. The light having the angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and proceeds toward the axis of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing), the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected. Can be incident.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light having the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated on the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and is reflected. The reflected light can be made incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing).

  That is, since the guide groove 2641 is recessed on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 can be reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. The light can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620.

  Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 by forming a recess on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the function of collecting light to the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. .

  In addition, compared to the first embodiment, the amount (light amount) of light incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 2640, and the appearance is correspondingly reduced. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  Note that, of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light emitted to the gear member 630 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620 has been described. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are different from each other. A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

  First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 64A is a front view of a projection plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 3640 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a projection along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. It is a cross section of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. FIG. 14 is a sectional view of a groove forming member 640.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape in a front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge thereof on the rear side and the front side. It is arranged on each side. The projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and has a projection 3623 protruding from the front side and the rear side at an outer edge thereof.

  The protrusion 3623 is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section that projects toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64B) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64B) toward the outer edge. Further, the protrusion 3623 protruding to the front side has its tip set on the line of the imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the concave groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Is done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 projecting to the rear side has its tip set on the imaginary line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the concave groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. You.

  The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 3630 has a concave groove 3635 recessed at a predetermined interval on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 64B) and a screw formed to penetrate at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. And a stop hole 636 for use.

  The concave groove 3635 is a groove that is formed in the radial direction and is formed on both circumferential sides of each stop hole 636. Thus, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64B).

  The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate shape having an annular shape in a front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed so as to penetrate at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction with a concave groove 3645 formed in the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval. And an opening 646 for screwing.

  The concave groove 3645 is a groove that is formed in the radial direction and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Accordingly, when the groove forming member 3640 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

  In this case, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with the ground is provided with an opening 646 for inserting a bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, as shown in FIG. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Accordingly, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 may be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for holding the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 66A and 66B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66 (b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for easy understanding.

  In FIG. 66B, similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. It is considered that there is no light, and the light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is illustrated in a state of being orthogonal. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 66A and FIG. 66B, of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the light of the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

  The light that has entered the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Accordingly, light that has entered the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (the axis side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflector 622, and is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

  In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflection portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can easily reach the reflection portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, and And patterns can be clearly emerged.

  On the other hand, light emitted at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with the gap therebetween as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is used in the first embodiment. It does not enter the projection plate member 620 as in the embodiment.

  Accordingly, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected on the projection plate member 3620 side to be incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630. Can be suppressed from being incident. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display provided on the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from being raised (displayed) by light other than the LED 651.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps with the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (c)). A portion where light does not enter can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light enters from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident from the LED 651 on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  Further, in this case, since the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire area overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, the grounding surface can be secured. The displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

  Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, light from the LED 651 is inserted through the gap toward the axis of the projection plate member 3620, Light may leak from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  On the other hand, since the projection 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is transmitted between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. It is not irradiated to the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  Further, since the protrusion 3623 can increase the length of the side surface of the edge of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Next, an irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68A is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 near the second block 654. FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). FIG. 68 schematically shows a state in which irradiation unit 4650 is provided on base member 610.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the board member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the height of the head of the screw S2 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height of the LED 651. That is, the protrusion amount of the screw S2 from the front of the substrate member 620 is set to be larger than the protrusion amount of the LED 651.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 has the height of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is abutted (circumscribed), the dimensions of the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 are set so that the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2 cannot contact the outer peripheral surface.

  Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when the projection plate member 620 is approached to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial play based on a dimensional tolerance or an assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed from a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed from a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Effect can be enhanced. Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

  As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the rear base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

  Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial play caused by the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of parts can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

  Next, a projection unit 5600 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disk shape in a front view and rotated about the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. In the following, a description will be given of a case in which the slider is displaced in one direction.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 72 illustrates a state where the rear base 5611 is removed.

  As shown in FIG. 69 to FIG. 72, the projection unit 5600 is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and has a central portion opened at a central portion thereof, and is arranged slidably at the opening portion of the base member 5610. A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620.

  The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and has a central portion opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a rear base 5611 is disposed in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611. A projection base member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 6565) are provided in an internal space formed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

  As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in a front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on an outer edge on the back side and a rectangular opening in a central portion in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view. A central opening 5612h, an inner erected portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i formed at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k formed so as to protrude rearward from between the pair of holding portions 5612i, and sliding protrusions 5612m formed protruding rearward from below the central opening portion 5612h. You.

  The central opening 5612h is opened in the center of the front base 5612 in a front view in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The player can visually recognize the pattern and the pattern of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the projection unit 5600 via the central opening 5612h.

  The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625 described later, and is formed at the upper end of the central opening portion 5612h on the rear side of the front base 5612 (on the front side in FIG. 71). Further, the holding portion 5612i has a recessed groove 5612i1 formed on the protruding surface so as to be recessed on the front side (the back side on the paper in FIG. 71).

  The concave groove 5612i1 is concavely formed in an arc shape in cross section from the center portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) toward the end portion, and the inner diameter of the concave groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of a rod member 5625 described later. It is formed larger than. Further, the pair of concave grooves 5612i1 is formed at the same position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is determined by the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the dimension in the direction. Therefore, after the rod member 5625 is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the rear side (front side in FIG. 71). The bar member 5625 can be disposed on the front base 5612 by arranging the holding portion covers 5628 provided with at both ends (see FIG. 72).

  The shaft portion 5612k is a projection serving as a rotation axis of a rotating member 5670 described later, and is disposed above the central opening portion 5612h at a position symmetrical with respect to a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

  The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion for guiding the displacement of a rack 5627 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the rear side. Further, the pair of sliding projections 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical about a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

  The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmitting material, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by a player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the projected light is converted into a pattern or the like. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a form of a design. That is, it is possible to make a pattern or design stand out (display) on the front of the third design display device 81.

  The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at a lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is provided below the opening at the center of the base member 610 (the center opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is located at a position invisible from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. The rack 5627 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long horizontally when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set to be longer than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 72). Thus, the movable range of the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

  The rack 5627 has a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 formed on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center.

  The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). And is formed over the entire area on the lower surface side of the rack 5627.

  The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the tilt of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the driving of the drive motor 661, and is long opened in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 is inserted. Accordingly, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slid. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

  Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620, a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 interposed therebetween. And a shaped front cover 5626.

  The rod member 5625 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620, and is formed shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611. The projection plate member 5620 is disposed between the projection plate members 5620.

  The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625. The length dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set substantially equal to the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The projection plate member 5620 is provided with the bar member 5625 sandwiched between the member 5620 and the projection member 5620.

  The front cover 5626 has a groove 5626a that is recessed in the front side (the rear side in FIG. 72) on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620 and is recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside, and is concavely formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the concave dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. Is done.

  Thus, the bar member 5625 can be provided inside the groove portion 5626a. Thus, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed so as to be slidable in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the rod member 5625.

  Further, the rod member 5625 is disposed on the back side of the front side surface of the front cover 5626. That is, since the bar member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be provided on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

  Here, if the rod member 5625 projects from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the rear side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident on the inside thereof from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a form of a pattern or a pattern. When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel by the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 decreases. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed on the front cover 5626 in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light that has entered the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620.

  Further, as described above, since both ends of the bar member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off on the front base 5612, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Will be retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the bar member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72).

  Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left and right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

  The irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 disposed substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and an LED 651 disposed in front of the first block disposed on the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is arranged at the position facing. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be made to emerge.

  On the side surface of the front base 5612 where the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed, a bulging portion 5612n bulging in a substantially rectangular shape as viewed from the rear side is formed on the rear side (the front side in FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back side, and the height of the bulging portion is set to be larger than the thickness of a rotating member 5670 described later. Accordingly, a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, can be provided in a gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

  Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is provided in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching the protrusion 612g between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

  The rotating members 5670 are attached to the front side of the second blocks 654 provided at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

  The rotating member 5670 is a plate member bent and formed in an L-shape as viewed from the front. The rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612 in a state where the bent portion is located on the center in the left-right direction. A second block 654 at 650 is attached. Further, a through-hole 567 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

  The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is provided on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate around the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

  Here, the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, so that when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

  The rotating member 5670 is urged by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction of displacing the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k, and 5612. Further, a displacement regulating protrusion 5612j projecting to the rear side is formed below the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

  The displacement restricting protrusion 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and its protruding tip is located rearward (on the rear base 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 in a state where the rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612. The irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 is located on the front side (on the front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 and is formed. Accordingly, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is restricted by the displacement regulating protrusion 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is displaced by the displacement regulating protrusion. Blocking by 5612j can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73A is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73B is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

  FIG. 75A is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75B is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. In addition, the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is the same as the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the direction of displacement is only reversed left and right, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed substantially at the center on the left and right of the central opening 5612h, the rotation provided on both sides in the left-right direction is performed. The member 5670 is urged by an unillustrated urging spring, so that one end is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted to the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light of the LEDs 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides (the left and right sides in FIG. 74A) of the projection plate member 5620. Of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). When the slide is displaced rightward in the front view (rightward in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly displaced rightward (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). Accordingly, a second state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in the front view with respect to the central opening 5612h is formed.

  In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thus, a rotating moment in a direction of pushing up one end side around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as a rotating shaft can be applied to the rotating member 5670. Accordingly, one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, so that the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) (left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

  Thus, with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is displaced, and the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 is increased. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  Further, with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed, so that the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to change the form of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interesting.

  Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the LED disposed at another position is turned on in accordance with the displacement, so that the light amount of the projection plate member is kept constant. Accordingly, it is necessary to control turning on or off of the LED, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the control of the LED becomes, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is reduced. Furthermore, there is a problem that the cost of the product is increased by disposing the LED at another position.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since there is no need to control the turning on or off of the LED, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, if a plurality of fixed illuminators (LEDs) are provided around the illuminated object to irradiate the displaced illuminated object (projection plate member) with light, the irradiation range of each illuminated object There is a problem in that a portion having a weak light amount is formed between them, and when the illuminated object is displaced, light and dark are formed and the interest of the player is lowered. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement intervals of the irradiation bodies, but in this case, since the number of irradiation bodies to be arranged increases, the problem that the product cost increases. There was a point.

  However, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress light and dark from being produced due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

  Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 is reduced. The driving for sliding displacement and the driving for rotating the second block 654 can be combined, and it is not necessary to newly provide a driving unit for displacing the second block 654. As a result, an increase in the cost of the product can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and each of the blocks 653 and 654 formed of an elastically deformable material, it is not necessary to form the displaceable second block 654 by a separate member. Therefore, by arranging the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit on the front base 5612 and then connecting the wiring, the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

  On the other hand, when the rack 5627 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the drive of the drive motor 661 is reversed, so that the rack 5627 is displaced to the central position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid and displaced to form the first state.

  In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state (the left side in FIG. 74 (b)) is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the front base 5612 and the projection plate. As the member 5620 slides toward the center in the left-right direction, one end of the L-shape of the rotating member 5670 is pushed down, and the rotating member 5670 is rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotation range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is regulated by being brought into contact with the displacement regulating protrusion 5612j.

  As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is only a reversal of the displacement operation and the displacement direction from the first state to the second state. Description is omitted. Note that the third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b)).

  Next, a projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible from the player. However, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible from the player. Arranged as possible.

  First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 6620. Gear trains (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 6610 includes an annular rear base 611 and an annular front base 6612 disposed in front of the rear base 611, and is formed on an opposing surface of the rear base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are stored in the internal space.

  In the front base 6612, an annular shielding member 6612r in a front view is formed at the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment, and an opening that opens in a part of the shielding member 6612r in a fan shape in the front-rear direction. A part 6612p is formed.

  The opening 6612p is an opening for allowing the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back side to be visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape around the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view. The shielding member 6612r is formed to have a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612, between the middle standing portion 612b and the outside standing portion 612c of the outer edge of the opening 6612p, and the rear base 611 is placed on the back surface of the front base 612. Of the bases 611 and 612 are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (inner space).

  Projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in front view, and has an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of annular base 6612. The projection plate member 6620 is provided coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged such that the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 cannot be visually recognized by a player.

  The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 provided on the projection plate member 6620 are provided on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, on the rear side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Provided), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be suppressed from being deteriorated accordingly.

  The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light transmissive material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and visually recognizes the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. At the same time, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form of a pattern or a pattern, and the front base 6612 Through the opening 6612p. That is, it is possible to make a pattern or a design stand out (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

  In addition, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflection portion 6622 that irregularly reflects light inside. The reflecting portion 6622 is a portion whose inner surface is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is formed by dividing a plurality of patterns, patterns, and the like in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in a front view. You. In the present embodiment, the shape of the pattern, design, and the like of the reflection portion 6622 is formed by dividing the shape into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f of the six forms of the pattern, design, and the like are formed (see FIG. 80). .

  Further, the projection plate member 6620 has a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 provided on the outer peripheral edge on the rear side and the front side, respectively. Thus, similarly to the first embodiment, the driving force of the driving motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

  Next, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 80A to 80C are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80 (a) to 80 (c) show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the rear base 611 has been removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portions 6622 (reflection regions 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by dashed lines.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in a state where the projection plate member 6620 is disposed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is positioned inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (when viewed from the back side of the paper). A reflection area 6622a is provided. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, a pattern or a pattern of the reflection area 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the pattern or design that emerges inside the opening 6612p.

  In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also applied to the reflection regions 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection region 6622a. However, since the front base 6612 is provided on the front surface of the reflection regions 6622b and 6622f, the player cannot reflect The display of the regions 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern and the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the display other than the display surface is not visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the player is impaired by being able to visually recognize other areas. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected via the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is transmitted to the plate member and rotated. By rotating projection plate member 6620, the patterns and designs of reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside opening 6612p of front base 6612 in front view are switched. Thus, a plurality of different patterns and designs can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

  Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiation target (projection plate member 6620) and the display surface is switched by displacing the irradiation target, the visible region of the irradiation target (opening portion) From 6612p), the switching of the pattern or design of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can know which display is to be displayed next before finishing the switching of the pattern or design, so that the player can change the pattern of the irradiated object. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

  Further, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) for irradiating the object to be irradiated with light is turned off and the display surface of the object to be irradiated is darkened, the object to be irradiated is not affected by the light of the fluorescent lamp in the other device or the store. By being illuminated, a pattern or a pattern of the illuminated body can be visually recognized by a player.

  In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light transmissive material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern and the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 are hard to be visually recognized, and are brought into a transparent state. be able to. Therefore, when the projection plate member 6620 is rotated, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

  In the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about the center thereof as a rotation axis. The space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs to be visually recognized by the player via the opening 6612p of 6612.

  That is, when the projection plate member 6620 is slid, the arrangement space in the left-right or up-down direction is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 and the number on the drawing side. The space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

  Next, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in a winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following, similarly to the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is defined as the direction of gravity, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 10 is referred to as a front side (or a front side), and a back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as a back side (or a rear side).

  First, with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, a winning opening unit 930 and a throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 82, units (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) and the like) other than the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 provided on the base plate 60 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 82, a through-hole 60a penetrating through the thickness direction of the base plate 60 is provided below (in the lower part of FIG. 82) the gravity direction of the center opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

  The through-hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later in a front view, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 disposed in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

  A winning opening unit 930 is provided on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is provided from the opposite (rear) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configurations of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

  Next, the overall structure of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

  As shown in FIG. 83 to FIG. 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 disposed on the back side (front side in FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and A driving unit 960 disposed on the back side (front side of the drawing in FIG. 83B) of the specific winning opening unit 950 and a displacement member 966 disposed between the driving unit 960 and the front unit 940 are mainly included. It is formed in preparation for.

  As described above, the front unit 940 is formed such that the outer shape in a front view is larger than the through hole 60 a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 pass through the passages of the game balls formed in the front unit 940 to be described later (the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a). Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

  Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, so that game balls can be thrown into the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. Is done. The specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later in detail.

  The drive unit 960 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is provided to the wing member 945 disposed on the front unit via the displacement member 966. Be linked. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. The detailed operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

  Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In FIGS. 87A and 87B, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and a front base 943 disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. And two (one pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

  The rear base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially T-shape in which the outer shape in a front view is upside down and having a predetermined plate thickness. The rear base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. When the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the rear base 941 penetrates the base plate 60 through the rear base 941. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

  The back base 941 is formed with a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87B)) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 ( b) A specific winning opening 65a located in the upper part) and formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction, a second winning opening 140 formed through and above the specific winning opening 65a, and opposite to the first out opening 71. A first winning opening 64 formed by cutting out the side edge is mainly provided.

  The back base 941 has a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side (front side in FIG. 87 (a)) to the rear side (front side in FIG. 87 (b)), and from the back side to the front side. And a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced.

  The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the rear base 941 (winning opening unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw. Is done. Further, as described above, since the first through hole 941a1 is formed with a reduced diameter from the front side to the back side, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through-hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a protruding in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed.

  The positioning projection 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is formed to have the same outer diameter as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. You. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

  The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the rear base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the rear base 941, and has an inner diameter set to be larger than an outer diameter of a screwed portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened from the rear side of the rear base 941 with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the rear base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing only the front base 943 from the front side (the game area side) of the game board 13.

  In addition, since the second through-hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the rear side to the front side as described above, the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from projecting to the rear side of the rear base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is disposed on the back side of the rear base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from contacting the specific winning opening unit 950.

  The rear base 941 is formed such that the outer shape of the lower end in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 87B) is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 of the game board 13 (see FIG. A01). The first out port 71 is formed to have such a size that the edge of the notch bottom (the edge on the upper side in the gravity direction) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () of the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). The game balls that have not flowed into any of them can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87B) on the paper) through the first out port 71.

  The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 87B) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. The first winning opening 64 is formed such that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, game balls flowing into the first receiving portion 941g described later can be thrown toward the back side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)) on the paper through the first winning opening 64.

  At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941g that protrudes toward the game area side (on the front side of the drawing in FIG. 87 (a) and is formed in a cup shape and is opposite to the game area (FIG. b) A first throwing portion 942g protruding in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the drawing).

  The first receiving portion 941g is formed to have a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. Thus, a game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the direction of gravity of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning opening 64) can be flown into the first receiving portion 941g.

  In addition, the first receiving portion 941g is formed such that the bottom surface is inclined downward to the back side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87B)). Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving portion 941g can be thrown toward the back side (the first throwing portion 942g side) through the first winning opening 64.

  Further, the first receiving portions 941g are directed from the upper ends of both ends of the base plate 60 in the lateral direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 87) to the second winning opening side (the lower side in the gravity direction (the lower side in FIG. 87A)). And a guide portion 941g1 that is erected in the lateral direction outside of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and a side surface opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the downflow area from colliding with the first receiving portion 941g and damaging the first receiving portion 941g.

  Also, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, the arrangement of the gaming nails that change the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area becomes insufficient, so that the gaming balls are not provided. It is difficult to change the flowing direction of the air. Therefore, where there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be impaired, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, a change can be given in the downflow direction of the game ball, and the interest of the player can be prevented from being impaired. .

  Furthermore, since the guide portion 941g1 is formed to be inclined outward in the short direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left and right direction in FIG. 87A) toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941g1 The sphere can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the game nail (not shown) disposed on the base plate 60 can be caused to collide again, and the flow direction of the game ball can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

  The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape whose upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance between the opposing inner edges thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first throwing portion 942g is formed such that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the rear side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b))), and the projecting tip side has a throwing unit described later. 970 is in contact with the edge of the inlet 982d. Thereby, the game ball which is thrown from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g to the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the rear side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

  The first throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which an upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first concave notch 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of the ball feeding unit 970 described later is placed, and is notched to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. The detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

  The second winning opening 140 is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially D-shape whose upper part is curved in a front view, and has an inner edge formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, game balls thrown between the opposing wing members 945 described later can be thrown to the back side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side in FIG. 87 (b)) on the second winning opening 140.

  At the edge of the second winning opening 140, a front side wall portion 941b protruding toward the front side (the game area side (the front side in FIG. 87A)) and a rear side (the side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87)). (B) The second throwing portion 942c protruding on the front side of the drawing) is formed.

  The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that a protruding tip surface thereof comes into contact with a ball feeding guide portion 943d of a front base 943 described later.

  The second throwing portion 942c is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140 by bending in a substantially L-shape in rear view. The size of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game ball rolling on a rolling portion 943a of the front base 943 described below from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

  The pair of second throwing portions 942c has a distance dimension between the opposing sides in the short direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87B) and the short direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943 described later. The length is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (the left and right direction in FIG. 87 (b)), and the rolling part 943a is disposed inside. In the second throwing portion 942c, a second concave notch 942c1 is formed by cutting out the other end in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87B)) in the direction of gravity. The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be given later.

  The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (the upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) from the gaming area side of the rear base 941 to the opposite side to the gaming area. A first shaft hole 941d that is concavely formed in two places in a circular shape, and two first openings 941e that are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and formed through the back base 941; A first guide wall 942b located outside the two first openings 941e in a direction opposite to the first opening 941e and projecting rearward, and a projection 941c projecting between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Are formed.

  The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that supports a later-described wing member 945, and has an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted and supported in the first shaft hole 941d.

  The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as an axis. The first opening 941e is configured to allow the projection 945b of the wing member 945 to pass therethrough, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the projection 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from contacting the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

  The protruding portion 941c is formed in an isosceles triangular shape when viewed from the front, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portion are located on the substantially same plane as the central position between the opposing wing members 945 described later. The unequal side of the protruding portion 941c is formed to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and its length is set to be slightly larger than the distance between the facing wing members 945 in the closed state. You. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945). The detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

  The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described below is displaced, and the distance between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction of 966.

  The pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape in rear view, and extend in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Accordingly, the protrusion 966a of the displacement member 966 is brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

  The specific winning opening 65a is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in a direction facing the pair of wing members 945 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87B), and a plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described below is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. Thereby, game balls flowing down the game area can be thrown into the specific winning opening unit 950 via the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, the rear base 941 surrounds the periphery of the specific winning opening 65a and stands upright on the rear side (opposite to the game area), and a concave portion from the rear side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a. And a concave portion 941h to be provided.

  The shape of the inner edge of the upright portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 to be described later in a front view. Thus, the specific winning opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the upright portion 942f.

  The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall 953d into which the bar member 952 serving as the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. Thus, when the bar member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the bar member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the concave portion 941h, and the bar member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

  Further, the front base 942 includes a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the upright portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and a first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the upstanding portion 942f (see FIG. 87B And) a second guide wall 942d protruding upward.

  The bulging portion 942h bulges to the back side of the back base 941, and is connected to the upright portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. Accordingly, when a later-described displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) is disposed on the back side of the back base 941 (on the front side in FIG. 87B), the gap between the displacement member 966 and the back surface of the back base 941 is provided. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

  The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Is set. Accordingly, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

  The back base 941 is located halfway toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) at the edge of the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) at both ends in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. A second out port 941f formed by cutting out in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a cutout for sending game balls flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the rear side of the base plate 60 (opposite to the game area). Is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of.

  Further, a third throwing portion 942e, which is formed in a substantially U-shape as viewed from the rear and protrudes to the rear side, is formed at the edge of the second outlet 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

  The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in rear view projects rearward, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the rear side. A detailed description of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third throwing portion 942e will be described later.

  The front base 943 is formed in an approximately T-shape that is upside down and has an outer shape in front view smaller than that of the rear base. The front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate. This allows the player to visually recognize a game ball flowing between the front base 943 and the rear base 941 facing each other.

  The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the above-described rear base 941. It is formed.

  The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U-shape in rear view, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside in front view. Further, a pair of wing members 945 described later is disposed on the open side (open side of the U-shape) of the second receiving portion 943c. Further, the projecting distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game balls can be sent between the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game balls are prevented from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the pair of wing members 945 described later. it can.

  Further, the second receiving portion 943c has a ball feeding guide portion 943d protruding inward from the inner edge thereof, and a first concave portion which is concavely formed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87B). 943ca, and a rolling portion 943a protruding from the inside of the curved portion to the rear base side.

  The ball feeding guide portion 943d is formed as a pair below the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 87B). The pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, the end faces thereof come into contact with each other. . Thereby, the game ball flowing between the pair of wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball sending guide portions 943d.

  The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) between the pair of ball feeding guide portions 943d and the upper end surface 943a1 in the direction of gravity is inclined downward toward the rear base 941. It is formed. In addition, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the concave portion 941j in a state where the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the rear surface of the rear base 941. Side (FIG. 87B).

  Thereby, the game ball sent between the pair of the ball feeding guide portions 943d can be sent to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1, and the rear side of the rear base 941 Can be sent to

  In addition, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b provided in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at an inner edge thereof, and the other end of a shaft member 945a that supports a later-described wing member 945 can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943.

  The third receiving portion 944a is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. This allows the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 to flow inside the third receiving portion 944a, and allows the game balls flowing into the third receiving portion 944a to flow through the second out port 941f. The ball can be sent to the side (the side opposite to the game area).

  In the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, a first concave portion 943ca and a second concave portion 944a1 are formed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87B). The first concave portion 943ca and the second concave portion 944a1 are fastening portions into which the screws inserted into the second through holes 941a2 are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through holes 941a2 of the back base 941. Is done. Thereby, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

  A pair of the wing members 945 are provided with a second winning opening 140 formed in the rear base 941 interposed therebetween in a front view. The wing member 945 is formed of a colored translucent material, and is visible to a player via the front base 943.

  The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a smaller thickness than the space between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c penetratingly formed in the thickness direction (from the rear base 941 side to the front base 943 side), and a projection 945b projecting from the surface (rear surface) of the rear base 941 side.

  The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the rear base 941 and the front base 943, the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate with the wing member 945 rotatable. It can be arranged between the opposite sides. Thus, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

  The projection 945b is connected to a displacement member 966 described later, and is a transmission portion for transmitting the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945. The tip of the projection 945b is provided via the first opening 941e of the rear base 941. The size is set to protrude from the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the game area). The detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

  Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

  The displacement member 966 is formed of a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed at a substantially central position as viewed from the front in a plate thickness direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 90B). In the second opening 966c, the shape of the inner edge in a front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. Thus, it is possible to suppress a game ball sent to the opposite side of the game area via the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

  The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (the upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) and in the lateral direction (the left / right direction in FIG. 90 (a)). A bulging portion 966b bulges from the end side (the lower side in FIG. 90B) to the rear side (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The protrusion 966a has a sliding groove 966a2 formed through the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction of the displacement member 966, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 966 and extending in the longitudinal direction. Is provided.

  The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as a long hole that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966. The width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thus, when the wing member 945 rotates, the protrusion 945b abuts on both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 facing each other in the width direction, so that the operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed from being restricted.

  The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge toward the front side (the front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (the back base 941 side). Thus, the area where the displacement member 966 contacts the front base 943 and the drive unit 960 described below can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

  The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the rear side (the side of the rear base 941), and has a horizontally-long rectangular connection hole 966b1 formed at an inner portion in a rear view. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. The detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

  The connection hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to one contacted portion 966b2 of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 90A)). And the other contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90A)).

  The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface on which a bulged portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 described later contacts. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the swelling portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and slidingly displaced.

  The other-side abutted portion 966b3 is a surface that abuts a side surface of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, on a side opposite to a bulged portion 965e1. The displacing member 966 displaces the wing member 945 to a closed state (see FIG. 91) by sliding the side opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 to the other-side abutted portion 966b3 and sliding. Can be.

  Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87B. In FIGS. 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Also, FIG. 91 illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 illustrates the opened state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in rear view, and is formed in parallel with the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. A surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

  The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (on the side of the connection hole 966b1) and contacts the projection 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the open state. The upper inner surface 966a3 that comes into contact with the 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the closed state, and the inner side in the short direction of the displacement member 966 from the outside in the short direction (left and right direction in FIG. 91) of the displacement member 966 toward the lower inner surface 966a4. And an inclined surface 966a5 that is inclined at a right angle.

  Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back base 941 by a transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a (the lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 (the upper side in FIG. 91). It is opened.

  Next, connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the projection 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside in the short direction of the displacement member 966). When the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 (the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 91)) from this state, the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the projection 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact therewith. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

  Here, a game ball is formed to be capable of entering the ball, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball opening and opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of the pair of wing members. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and one end of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion that projects from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, opposing portions that are vertically opposed at predetermined intervals are formed, and a protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is not stable because the gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion needs to be set large. That is, when the rotating member is rotated for the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the projecting portion, and the facing interval of the facing portion is equal to the outer shape of the projecting portion. In this case, the projecting portion interferes between the opposing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing interval of the facing portion to a size that does not interfere with the projecting portion, and accordingly, the gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion increases. As a result, the wing member is likely to rattle, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The projection 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945, and the sliding groove 966a2 through which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a slide displacement, and the posture of the slide groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating like a conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for disposing the displacement member in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, space for disposing other members can be secured.

  Here, in the present invention, since the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, the displacement member 966 is moved in the gravity direction. At the time of operation in the direction of sliding displacement upward (the other side in the direction of gravity), the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the inertia force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to start the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state and smoothly perform the initial operation when displacing the wing member 945 to the open state or the closed state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is located below the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity). Is located. That is, the position of the projection 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (the other side in the direction of gravity) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the direction of gravity. This makes it possible to increase the displacement component of the protrusion 945b pushed up on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 91) and to decrease it in the direction of gravity (the downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started, and the initial operation at the time of opening or closing can be smoothly performed.

  The center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the projection 945b with respect to the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c). Thus, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state using the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, and the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (own weight). Can be done. Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the driving of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started and opened.

  Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Accordingly, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The sliding displacement 966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity) can be smoothly started.

  Further, since the inclined surface 966a5 is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced. By this contact, in addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity, the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the wing member 945 in the closed state. That is, even in the case where the wing member 945 is affected by the vibration accompanying the flow of the game ball, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open position or the closed position.

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower in FIG. 92)). Side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the projection 945b, and the projection 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

  Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thus, when closing the wing member 945, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

  Next, the driving unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first storage portion 962 and a second storage portion 963 formed in a box shape and disposed to face each other, and a first storage portion 962 and a second storage portion. A solenoid 610 disposed in a space between the solenoids 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a shaft supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. A transmission member 965 is mainly provided.

  The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side (the upper side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610, and a portion from the covering portion 962a to the rear base 941 side (FIG. 85). And a guide portion 962b that protrudes from the guide portion 962b.

  The covering portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (the lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. The covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the facing wall surface.

  The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging an engaging portion 963c of a second accommodation portion 963 described later, and is formed to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. Thereby, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are fastened, so that the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are engaged. The workability of the fastening with the member can be improved.

  The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 when the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is located on the second housing portion 963 side (the lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). It has a through hole 962da penetrating toward it.

  The through-hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 is inserted. The through-hole 962da is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1 and has a larger inner diameter than the fastening hole 963b1. Formed. Thereby, the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

  The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arms 962e formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, and connected to the pair of arms 962e. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962g projecting from the wall portion 962f on the side opposite to the covering portion 962a (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The arm portion 962e protrudes toward the back base 941 (see FIG. 85) from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a, and bends the protruding tip side to the other side in the direction of gravity (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L-shape. The distance between the pair of arms 962e is set to be substantially the same as the distance between both ends in the horizontal direction of the side wall 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980 described later. The part 981b is inserted.

  The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces on the distal end side (bending side) of the arm portion 962e described above, and the shape of the wall portion 962e in a front view is larger than the above-described front view shape of the displacement member 966. The wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) that is opposite to the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941 described above. Are set substantially equal to the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the direction of gravity (FIG. 93 (a) up and down direction) that is equal to the distance between the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941 and It is set substantially equal to the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (L5 = L6). Accordingly, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall 962f and the back base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the first guide wall 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall 962f and the back base 941 can be disposed between the opposing walls.

  The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outer side of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the direction opposite to the arm portion 962e (the vertical direction in FIG. 93B). The projection size of the first guide wall 942b is set to be substantially the same. Further, the inner dimension L7 of the protruding portion 962g in the facing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is slightly smaller than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) of the back base 941 in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d. Set to a large value. Further, the protrusion 962g has a dimension in the direction of gravity set to be substantially the same as a dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the upright portion 942f.

  Thus, when disposing the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the rear base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the protruding portions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b. The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the rear base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the upright portions 942f.

  The second housing portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box-like body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (the lower side in FIG. 93A). The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in a driving direction of a solenoid 610 (to be described later, a horizontal direction in FIG. 93B) when viewed from above. In addition, the second housing portion 963 is provided with a concave portion 963e formed in a plurality of locations on both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and a first housing portion 962 side between the plurality of recessed portions 963e. An engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, a protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both walls extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) ) And a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

  The protruding portion 963b is formed so as to protrude in a semicircular shape outward in the short direction of the second housing portion 963, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first housing portion 962. Thereby, a screw having a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first housing portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1, and the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

  The concave portion 963e is an opening that circulates air in a space formed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recess 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first housing 962 and the second housing 963 can be cooled.

  The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first housing portion 962 from between a plurality of the recessed portions 963e arranged side by side, and the tip thereof is formed in a hook shape bent inward in the short direction of the second housing portion 963. You. Further, as described above, the engagement portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first storage portion 962, and when the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one end surface of the first housing portion 962.

  Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the concave portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when disposing the engagement portion 963c in the first accommodation portion 962, the engagement portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engagement portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodation portion 962.

  The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating a rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 described later, and is recessed to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c. In addition, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first housing portion 962 side is covered by a side surface of the first housing portion 962 on one side in the direction of gravity, and the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 are combined. In this state, the rotation shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing 963d can be prevented from coming off the bearing 963d.

  Solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b inserted inside main body 961a and displaceable with respect to main body 961a, and a side opposite to main body 961a of shaft 961b. And a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body 961a.

  The main body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the magnetism allows the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body portion 961a to be drawn inward and inserted.

  The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged such that the axial direction is directed toward the rear base 941, and is arranged in a state where a part of the rear base 941 protrudes from the main body portion 961a.

  The annular portion 961c is disposed at an end of a shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964 described below is connected to the annular portion 961c. Thus, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

  The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound spirally a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is provided around the shaft portion 961b, and is slightly compressed between the annular portion 961c and the body portion 961a. Thus, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the main body 961a. Therefore, in a state where power is not supplied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. In addition, when the supply (supply) of power is interrupted after the supply (supply) of power to the main body 961a, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

  The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the other side of the base portion 964a in the direction of gravity from the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). (See FIG. 2).

  The base portion 964a is a portion that is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the deep side in the drawing of FIG. 93B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. And a second concave portion 964d which is located on the solenoid 610 side of the first concave portion 964c and is concavely formed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

  The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape whose one side in the direction of gravity is open in a sectional view. The groove width of the first concave portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thus, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first concave portion 964c.

  The second concave portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first concave portion 964c as described above. In addition, it is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in a rear view, and is formed so as to open from the first concave portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

  The upright portion 964b has an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, and a projection 965d of a transmission member 965 described later is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. Thus, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the projecting portion 965d contacts the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmitting member 965 is displaced. The detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

  The transmission member 965 is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a tip 965a extending in the direction of displacement of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotation extending to the connection member 964 and connected to the tip 965a. 965b.

  The rotating part 965b is formed such that the width dimension of the second housing part 963 in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is smaller than the distance between the pair of bearing parts 963d formed in the second housing part 963. Is done. The rotating part 965b has a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes in a columnar shape on both sides in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the second housing part 963 at the end on the 964 side, and a radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. And a protruding portion 965d protruding toward one end in the direction of gravity.

  As described above, the rotating shaft 965c has an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing 963d. Further, the distance between the protruding tips of the pair of rotating shafts 965c is set to be larger than the distance between the opposing bearing portions 963d formed in the second housing portion 963. Thus, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second housing portion 963 and the first housing portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

  As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. Further, in a state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (electric power is supplied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a), the width of the protrusion 965d in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is: The width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be sufficiently larger than the width of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width of the protrusion 965d). Accordingly, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d on both end surfaces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b abut on the insertion hole 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is regulated. Can be suppressed.

  The width of the tip 965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e that is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above, and an upright portion 965f that protrudes from the connection side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Formed.

  The outer shape of the insertion portion 965e when viewed from the front is formed smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted through the inside of the connection hole 966b1. Accordingly, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

  Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 96A and 96B are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93B. FIG. 96 (a) illustrates a state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) illustrates a state after the operation of the solenoid 610. Further, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 provided between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (the left side in FIG. 96A).

  When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in a direction away from the main body 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (the right side in FIG. 96A) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side Is in a state of contact with the inner surface of. Thus, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 96 (a)) about the rotation shaft 965c. In addition, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the direction of gravity is regulated by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), in a state where power is supplied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is drawn into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a, and is thus circular. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (as compared to a state where power is not supplied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). Thus, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a (the right side in FIG. 96A).

  When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the side opposite to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96B) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 are formed. The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface on the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96 (b)) are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 96B) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 toward the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted by the connection between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b abutting on the first housing portion 962.

  Therefore, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, so that the transmission member 965 is moved to one of the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963. Can be abutted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a player's misconduct.

  For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first housing portion 962 or the second housing portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is increased. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965, it is possible to make the store operator easily find the illegality.

  In addition, as described above, the transmission member 965 extends from the rotation shaft 965c and is connected to the displacement member 966, and the tip 965a and the rotation portion 965b, and extends from the rotation shaft 965c and is connected to the solenoid 610. And the tip 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed to be bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be reduced.

  That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is different from the distal end portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance is set to be substantially equal to the combined distance of the rotating part 965b, the sliding displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 increases, The whole becomes larger.

  On the other hand, the distal end 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip 965a and the rotating part 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed to be bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 is achieved. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while securing the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back side (the right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b opposite to the displacement member 966. Thus, the space generated by bending the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively used, and the transmission member 965 can be reduced in size. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently disposed in the space between the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (a throwing unit 970 to be described later) and the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the overall size is reduced. Can be achieved.

  Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. FIG. 98 (a) illustrates a state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 98 (b) illustrates a state after the operation of the solenoid 610.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

  Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 98A), FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulge portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one contacted portion 966b2 of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 slides to the other side in the direction of gravity. Is done.

  As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning opening 140 side), the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is opened.

  On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is interrupted, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is moved in the gravity direction by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 disposed on the solenoid 610 as described above. Side (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other contacted portion 966b3 of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact, and the displacement member 966 is moved to one side in the direction of gravity. The slide is displaced.

  As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, by shutting off the supply (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is closed.

  In this case, the wing member 945 can be closed in a state in which the supply (supply) of power to the main body 961a is shut off, so that the main body 961a may be closed due to disconnection of the wiring of the main body 961a or misbehavior of the player. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being in an open state and a state where a game ball is likely to flow into the second winning opening 140.

  Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by a connection hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the short direction of the displacement member 966. Accordingly, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid along with the rotation of the transmission member. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

  That is, during the operation of sliding the displacement member 966 with the rotation of the transmission member 965 to open or close the pair of wing members 945, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When actuated, the position of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two places. In this case, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and the resistance when sliding the displacement member 966 (that is, rotating the transmission member 965) is reduced. This causes the opening or closing of the wing member to be hindered. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and to the transmission member 965 at one place, the pair of wing members Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945, the change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed.

  Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface between the one contacted part 966b2 and the other contacted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum outer dimension D2 of the projection 945b (FIG. 98). (See (a))). This makes it easier to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set to be large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the connection between the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 is changed. The position of the displacement member 966 is regulated by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum outer dimension D2 of the projection 945b. The regulation of the change can be suppressed. As a result, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed.

  It is preferable that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set to be smaller than twice the maximum outer dimension D2 of the projection 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily suppress the contact between the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1. As a result, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed.

  Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. FIG. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 includes a ball-entering member 953 formed in a box-like body opened on the player side (the front side in FIG. 99), and opening of the ball-entering member 953. A plate member 951 disposed to cover the portion, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 across the ball input member 953, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

  The plate member 951 is formed of a colored translucent resin material, and allows a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down the ball input member 953 via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape in a front view, a shaft hole 951b formed in a cylindrical shape on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. Of the main body 951a, and an engaging portion 951d protruding from the other longitudinal end of the main body 951a toward the ball input member 953.

  The main body portion 951a is formed to have a size that covers the open side of a ball entry member 953 described later in a front view, and has a shape slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

  The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the main body 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of a rod member 952 described later, and the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953 by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 inserted in the shaft hole 951b.

  The protrusion 951c is formed so as to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a. Accordingly, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 951b by the driving of the drive unit 957 described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area, the main body portion 951a is moved to the main body portion 951a. It is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from falling from one longitudinal side of the main body 951a.

  The engagement portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to a tip 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b as an axis, a part of the engagement portion 951d protrudes toward the downflow area, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body 951a has the main body 951a. Can be prevented from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction.

  The ball entry member 953 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a rectangular box shape that is horizontally long in a front view, an upright wall 953b that stands upright on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f protruding from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c protruding in an annular shape from the surface opposite to the opening side of the main body 953a, and an opening portion 953f from the opening side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d protruding from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other longitudinal side of the main body portion 953a; A projection 953g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a projection 953h projecting from the open side edge of the main body 953a toward the plate member 951, and two locations formed through the bottom surface of the main body 953a. With an inlet 953j It is.

  The main body portion 953a is formed to have a size that allows game balls to be inserted into the inner portion of the box shape, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls game balls flowing from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in a front view is formed slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the upright portion 942f of the above-described front unit 940. Thus, the main body 953a (the ball entry member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. The detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

  In addition, the longitudinal dimension of the main body 953a is set to be larger than the above-mentioned separation distance outside the pair of wing members 945 in the facing direction. Thus, even when a game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of wing members 945, the game ball can be caused to flow into the main body 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

  The opening 953a1 has an inner edge formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and allows the game ball to flow into the main body 953a through the opening 953a1 when the plate member 951 is opened. it can.

  The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the main body portion 953a, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, a game ball sent from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

  The upright wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the three-direction outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 that is formed in a substantially horizontally-long rectangular shape in rear view. It is formed in size.

  The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 except for the three directions surrounded by the upright wall 953b. Thus, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the upright wall 953b and the engagement portion 953f. In addition, the engaging portion 953f has a distal end portion that is separated from the base end by a distance corresponding to the thickness of the detection device SE1 toward the standing wall 953b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE1 and the engagement portion 953f from engaging with each other and the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

  The detection device SE1 is a device for detecting the passage of a game ball, and has a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball penetratingly formed in the thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed so as to be deviated in one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1 disposed in a horizontally elongated rectangular state in rear view, and the other one of the longitudinal directions in which the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is provided on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j to be described later, and can pass a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j.

  The annular projection 953c is formed in a ring shape and protrudes from a plurality of locations on the side opposite to the open side of the main body part 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball input member 953 is screwed to an inner edge portion thereof.

  The wall portion 953d is formed as a pair on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the distance between the opposing walls is shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

  In addition, a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body 953a is formed in the wall 953d. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after disposing the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. The ball can be supported by the ball input member 953.

  Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a projecting dimension smaller than the recessed distance of the concave portion 941h formed on the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the concave portion 941h. Thus, the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b can be prevented from coming off.

  The insertion hole 953 e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 provided in a passage member 955 described later is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 provided in the passage member 955. Is done.

  The projecting portion 953 g is formed to project on the axis of the connection projection 942 j of the front unit 940. In a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connection protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protruding portion 953g are coaxially arranged, and The set part 953g and the connection protrusion 942j are in contact with each other. By screwing the screw inserted from the specific winning opening unit 950 into the insertion hole 953g1 to the inner circle 942j1, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed.

  The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body 953a.

  Further, the projection 953h is formed at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the projection 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the projection 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the projection 951c.

  The inflow port 953j is formed from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side so as to open in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending a game ball flowing into the inside of the main body 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed as a pair in the longitudinal direction of the main body 953a.

  Here, a game provided with a ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening / closing member for opening / closing the entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entering the ball entrance Machines are known. The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls entered in the entrance are gathered in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member To the ball one by one. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is increased in size, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is correspondingly increased. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time to arrive at the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pair of inlets 953j are formed at predetermined intervals (two places), even when the size of the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a is increased, the size of the inlet 953j up to the inlet 953j is increased. The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to reach the inflow port 953j, and to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  Further, a detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball input member 953 is provided at a connection portion between an inflow port 953j and a recess 955a of a passage member 955 described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

  The inlet 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are not overlapped with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the state where the front winning unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 is arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

  Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 (the pair of wing members 945) in the direction of gravity. Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow down below the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap in the gravitational direction with the pair of closed wing members 945. The inlet 953j can be made closer. This allows the game ball flowing into the ball input member 953 to flow into the inlet 953j in a short time. As a result, the over-winning of the game ball to the ball input member 953 can be suppressed.

  The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has an outer shape in a front view that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the above-described ball input member 953 in a front view. The passage member 955 has a pair of recesses 955a that are recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of the respective detection devices SE1, and a pair of recesses 955a that are located on the other side in the longitudinal direction and are closer to the ball entry member 953 from the drive unit 957 side. A second opening 955b penetrating the drive unit 957, and a pair of third openings 955c penetrating from the drive unit 957 side to the ball-entering member 953 at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion on the other side in the gravity direction of the third opening 955c. It is provided with a rolling portion 955d provided and a second recess 955f located between the pair of recesses 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

  The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding a game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the length of the passage member 955 in the longitudinal direction and the size of the recess on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is done.

  The second opening 95b is a space in which a connection member 957c and a transmission member 958 of the drive unit 957 described later are provided. Further, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) protruding in a cylindrical shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 through the shaft hole 958b.

  The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged in parallel with the direction of gravity is disposed, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in a front view. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be disposed inside the third opening 955c. In the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 is protruded toward the ball entry member 953 in a state where the detection hole SE1 is disposed inside the third opening 955c.

  At the edge of the third opening 955c, an engagement portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engagement portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

  The rolling part 955d is formed to be curved in an arc shape. In the state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the end of the rolling unit 955d on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third throwing unit 942e of the front unit 940. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning port unit 950.

  The other end of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the direction of gravity of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 provided in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

  The second concave portion 955f is formed between the pair of concave portions 955a serving as a passage of the game ball as described above. The second concave portion 955f is a depression in which the above-described drive unit 960 is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 99 (c)) of the passage member 955 is the second size of the above-described drive unit 960. The distance is set to be larger than the distance dimension of the accommodation portion 963 in the short direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93B).

  In the second concave portion 955f, an insertion hole 955h penetratingly formed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955, and a projection 955g projecting toward the drive unit 957 are formed. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

  The projection 955g is formed in a columnar shape, and has a fastening hole 955g1 formed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) is screwed, and faces the long hole 963f formed in the second housing portion 963 of the drive unit 960. Formed at the position where Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

  The drive unit 957 is formed to include a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connection member 957c disposed at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

  The solenoid 957a includes a main body 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 957a2 inserted inside the main body 957a1 and displaceable with respect to the main body 957a1, and a side of the shaft 957a2 opposite to the main body 957a1. And a coil spring SP2 arranged between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body 957a1.

  The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the magnetism allows the shaft portion 957a2 to be inserted into the main body portion 957a1 to be drawn inside the main body portion 957a1 and inserted. Is done.

  The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed toward the passage member 955, and is arranged such that a part on the back base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 957a1.

  The annular portion 957a3 is disposed at an end of a shaft 957a2 protruding from the main body 957a1. A connecting member 957c described below is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Thus, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

  The coil spring SP2 is a spring member wound spirally a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2 and is slightly compressed between the annular portion 957a3 and the body 957a1. Thus, the annular portion 957a3 can be biased in a direction away from the main body 957a1. Therefore, in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body 957a1. Further, when the supply (supply) of power is interrupted after the supply (supply) of power to the main body 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body 957a1.

  The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft 957a2 is inserted is opened. Further, the case member 957b is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2, and an opening 957b2 formed through the opposite side to the open side.

  The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. The screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

  The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft 957a2. Thus, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

  The connecting member 957c is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c includes a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99B) with a diameter larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. There is provided a second recessed portion 957c2 which is located on the solenoid 957a side of 957c1 and is recessed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 which protrudes toward the ball input member 953 side.

  The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape whose one side in the direction of gravity is open in a sectional view. The groove width of the first concave portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first concave portion 957c1.

  The second concave portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first concave portion 957c1 as described above. In addition, it is formed in a substantially U-shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open when viewed from the rear, and is formed so as to open from the first concave portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

  The engaging portion 957c3 is formed to bend into a substantially L shape in a side view. In the engagement portion 957c3, a connection portion 958a of a transmission member 958 described below is provided inside the bent portion. Thus, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmitting member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

  The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular shape in a side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connection portion 958a that protrudes in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from an end portion on the connection member 957c side, and a tip portion that protrudes toward the plate member 951. 958c.

  As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) is inserted. The shaft hole 958b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. Thus, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

  The connecting portion 958a is disposed inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3, as described above. Accordingly, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmitting member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

  The distal end portion 958c is disposed by being inserted into the concave portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the distal end portion 958c is displaced, so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

  Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the line CII-CII in FIG. 99 (c). FIGS. 103A and 103B are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950. FIG.

  Note that FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a) show the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the open state of the plate member 951. The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the opening of the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a is the main body of the ball entry member 953. This is a state where it is separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a) and FIG. 103 (a), when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is interrupted, the shaft 957a2 is turned by the urging force of the coil spring SP2. 951 (the left side in FIG. 102 (a)). Thus, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also disposed on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body 957a1 side.

  In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is pushed out toward the plate member 951. As a result, a force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in a direction of rotating one side in the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 102A) about the shaft hole 958b.

  When the distal end portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the distal end portion 958c and the concave portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball input member 953. Is rotated. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

  When the plate member 951 is in the closed state, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. Accordingly, when the player performs an illegal operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent improper operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, breakage of the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), when power is supplied (supplied) to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is drawn into (adsorbed to) the inside of the main body 957a1. State. Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also disposed on the main body 957a1 side.

  In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body 958a1 side is moved with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. (FIG. 102 (b) right). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmitting member 965 in a direction in which the distal end portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 102B).

  When the tip 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip 958c and the recess 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body 953a of the ball input member 953. It is rotated in the direction to do. As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

  Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. Can be suppressed. As a result, breakage of the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

  Next, an inner portion of the main body 953a of the ball input member 953 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 104 (a) illustrates a state where the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104 (b) illustrates a state where the plate member 951 is attached. 104 (a) and 104 (b) show the closed state of the plate member 951.

  As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body 953a, an inclined surface 954a that is inclined to one side in the gravity direction from the middle position in the longitudinal direction of the main body 953a (left and right direction in FIG. 104 (a)) toward the outside is provided. A concave portion 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a projecting portion 954c projecting from a connection portion of the inclined surface 954a and the concave portion 954b, and a surface on both ends in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side are provided. And an upright wall 954d which is continuously provided.

  The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of a game ball for rolling the game ball flowing between the pair of inflow ports 953j to the inflow port 953j side, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing between the opposed sides of the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

  The concave portion 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (downward in FIG. 104 (b)), and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). Also, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave end surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body 953a to receive the inflow port 953j (passage member 955j). In the recess 955a). Therefore, a game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can flow into the concave portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, another time until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. Of the game ball can be suppressed, and the over prize can be suppressed.

  The recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104 (b)). This makes it possible to easily receive the game ball rolling the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (the left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) into the concave portion 954b, and to shorten the received game ball to the passage member 955. You can be guided (inflow) by time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  Further, the recess 954b has a width L9 (see FIG. 104 (b)) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, when a plurality of game balls are received in the concave portion 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in a state where the game balls are aligned. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the recess 954b, the width of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Accordingly, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the concave portion 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-described inclined surface 954a across the concave portion 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Formed. Thus, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e is rolled in front of the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The upstanding wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. Two guide surfaces 954d1 are provided.

  The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j toward the concave portion 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and is in contact with the longitudinal end of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955. Thus, the game ball flowing into the main body 953a from the longitudinal end of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The protruding portions 954c are formed at both longitudinal ends of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and protrude toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 104B) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced just before the concave portion 954b (the passage member 955). . That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased while the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced just before (immediately before) the concave portion 954b, and the game ball passes through the concave portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a. Rolling up to the two inclined surfaces 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in that short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to a surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the concave portion 954b side. Is formed so as to be connected to the side surface of the concave portion 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is opened toward the rolling direction of the game ball on the inclined surface 954a of the game ball (outward in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2). It is formed inclined to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced just before the concave portion 954b (passage member 955).

  That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is increased, and the rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is reduced immediately before (immediately) the concave portion 954b. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the concave portion 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in that short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  Further, as described above, since the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the short direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a, when the plate member 951 is in an open state, The end of the plate member 951 can be located at one end in the direction of gravity (on the direction of gravity) with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing into the inside of the main body 951a from jumping out of the opening 953a1 side of the main body 951a.

  Further, the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, so that the rolling speed of the game ball rolling the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be reduced before the concave portion 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the concave portion 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased while the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced just before (immediately before) the concave portion 954b, and the game ball passes through the concave portion 954b from the inclined surface 954a. Rolling up to the two inclined surfaces 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in that short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from a connection portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward a side portion 954c2 of a connection portion with the inclined surface 954a. This allows the game ball to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 from jumping out of the opening 953a1. Can be.

  That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is provided for a game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Since it is unlikely to jump out from the outside, it is possible to prevent rolling from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e through the concave portion 954b by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding to the opening 953a1 side. Thus, the fluid can flow into the passage member 955 in that short time. On the other hand, a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the standing wall 954d, and the deceleration can be surely performed. Therefore, a game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can quickly flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing jumping out of the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The protruding portion 954c has a side edge 954c3 of the end surface on the opposite side to the upright wall 954d and extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The upright wall 954d extends in a direction in which the second side edge 954d2 of the end surface on the opposite side to the protruding portion 954c is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge 954c3 has a length L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of the movement. Thus, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the upright wall 954d to surely reduce the speed and facilitate positioning the game ball near the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  Further, the vertical wall 954d has a distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between an intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e set to be substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 is brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and the speed can be surely reduced. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  A protruding portion 954c is located on an extension of the second guide surface 954d1 of the upright wall 954d in the inclined direction, and the rolling of the game ball guided by the second guide surface 954d1 toward the concave portion 954b (passage member 954). Even when the dynamic speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c to reduce the speed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the protruding portion 954c, a distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the concave surface of the concave portion 954b to the protruding tip is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the concave portion 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), such a game ball can be easily brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960 taken along the line CVIa-CVIa of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is a line CVIb-CVIb of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in FIG.

  In FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b), a wiring HS1 connected to a solenoid 957a operating a plate member 951 and a solenoid 610 operating a pair of wing members (see FIG. 83 (a)). A part of the wiring HS2 shown in FIG. In FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83A) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where the specific winning opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap in a front view. Formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the opposite side (back side) of the game area of the second winning opening 140 (the pair of wing members 945).

  Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 for opening or closing the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and the specific winning opening 65a There is known a gaming machine including a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a, and a second drive unit for driving the plate member 951. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the first driving unit and the second driving unit are disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 is provided on the back side of the plate member 951, it is possible to form a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. (See FIG. 97). That is, the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are integrated on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), so that other members and devices are provided. Space can be secured on the back surface of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be used effectively.

  Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening (where the center frame 86 is disposed) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is located far from the central opening. Is disposed on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate, so that the movable body of the operation unit to be visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is provided on the base plate. By retracting to the back side of 60 (the opposite side to the game area), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  That is, the movable body of the operation unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (retreat), making it difficult for a player to visually recognize the movable unit, and at the time of moving (extending) the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60. ), The operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening is changed to a specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the movable body at a position that overlaps the unit 950 in the horizontal direction, the movable body can be easily arranged at a position away from the central opening during evacuation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operation unit during normal (evacuation). As a result, when the movable body is moved to the overhang state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

  Further, the plate member 951 has a projection area in front view larger than the projection area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 including the two displacement members (the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members 945), respective driving means (the driving units 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is provided, each drive means can be easily provided on the back side of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945). Space can be formed.

  Further, the plate member 951 is formed such that the projected area in front view is larger than the projected area in front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively used.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left and right direction in FIG. 105 (a)). It is juxtaposed along. Therefore, the dead space on the back of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

  In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is disposed at a position further away from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. A01) than the pair of wing members 945, and The longitudinal direction is arranged orthogonal to the separating direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

  As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is provided through the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the driving unit 960 is mounted on the rear base 940. Since the drive unit 960 is connected to the front base 943, the drive unit 960 can be held (arranged) on the front base 943 at the same time when the rear base 941 is fastened and fixed to the front base 943. Thereby, when attaching the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (game board 13), it is possible to suppress forgetting to attach the drive unit 960.

  The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set such that the positions of the end portions on the opposite side (back side) of the specific winning opening unit 950 from the plate member 951 side are substantially the same, and the drive unit The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end (back side) of the specific winning opening unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 side. Thus, the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the wiring of the solenoid 610 can be easily collected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being scattered on the opposite side (back side) of the game board 13 from the game area, and to prevent the wirings HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

  That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are disposed in such a manner that the axial directions of the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 are directed in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (extracted) to the main body 961a and the shaft 957a2 on the side opposite to the shafts 961b and 957a2. Thus, the wiring HS1 of the driving unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the driving unit 957 can be easily combined.

  The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush. Thereby, the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are partitioned, and the shape of the partition member (not shown) that restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged can be simplified.

  That is, the sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or both sides in the direction of gravity of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces in the direction of gravity between the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step, so that the partitioning is made in accordance with the step. It is necessary to form a member, and the shape of the partition member becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can be formed in a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

  Note that the partitioning member is a conductive barrier for partitioning a region where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed and another region, and restricting an electromagnetic wave from flowing between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

  The transmission member 965 is provided between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is provided at the tip (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and opens and closes the pair of wing members 945 in accordance with the rotation of the pair is provided, the second prize can be obtained in comparison with a conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140 and on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a. Further, in order to avoid the interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the path of the game balls flowing from the second winning port 140 toward the specific winning port unit 950 side. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a) and FIG. 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is disposed at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair with the specific winning opening unit 950 as viewed from the front. Is established. That is, the detection device SE2 is disposed between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. Thus, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1. Can be difficult.

  Here, as described above, when the driving means (driving unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole that penetrates from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like is formed in the ball entry member 953 for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to find the illegality. Was feared.

  In other words, since the plate member 951 is disposed on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the clerk is notified of the illegality of the ball entry member 953. Is difficult to find.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the detection is performed. Since the detection substrate SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, it is possible to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 is closed by closing the plate member 951. In this case, it is particularly effective to detect a fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

  In addition, since the detection device SE1 is a common product (off-the-shelf product) that is the same as a detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 or the detection device SE3) that detects another game ball, a degree of freedom is secured in the size of the outer shape. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the opposing detectors SE1. Therefore, when the player drills the ball input member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a possibility that the fraudulent activity of the player cannot be notified to the clerk.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be provided in the gap formed between the pair of the detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player has penetrated a drill or the like aiming at a gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can notify the error and make it easier for the clerk to find the fraud.

  That is, the wiring is relatively easily damaged. Therefore, in the case where, for example, a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, the wiring HS3 is damaged (broken) due to the illegal act. ) Alternatively, it can be recognized that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and the illegal act can be easily suppressed.

  An annular projection 953c is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 so as to screw a screw for fastening the ball input member 953 and the passage member 955 together. Thus, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is improperly applied from the open side (the lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball input member 953, the drive unit 960 is screwed into the annular projection 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, such fraudulent acts can be made more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to cover the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is easily formed between the pair of detection devices SE1. Since the unshielded area on the front of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with the screw by setting the fastening position, the illegal act can be made more difficult.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound and arranged around the annular projection 953c of the ball input member 953. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the opening side of the ball entry member 953, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such cheating. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and it is easy to suppress the illegal act.

  Therefore, when the player pierces a drill or the like aiming at a gap between the pair of detection devices SE1, the wiring HS3 can be easily disconnected by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can notify the error and make it easier for the clerk to find the fraud.

  Further, the wiring HS3 is arranged by being wound around the annular protrusion 953c. Thereby, the force in the shear direction can be less likely to act on the connection portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction, so that the detection is performed. A force in the shear direction acts on the connection between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detecting device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in a shear direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and disposed, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950, the connection portion with the detection device SE1 is formed. Can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

  The annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 is formed at a position biased toward the end of the detection device SE1 on the side opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3. Accordingly, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (the annular protrusion 953c) of the screw, so that the wiring HS3 is drawn (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area on the front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screws and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such tampering.

  Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the throwing unit 970 includes a sorting unit 980 provided on the player side (game area side) and having a space in which game balls can be inserted, and a game area of the sorting unit 980. And a passage unit 990 provided on the opposite side.

  The distribution unit 980 has an opening (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) connected to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 of the above-mentioned winning opening unit 930, and the opening (inflow 982d and side wall 981b). ) Through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, a game ball thrown to the opposite side to the game area can be received inside. The detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

  The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end in the direction of gravity of the distribution unit 980 (on the lower side in the direction of gravity). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through holes 991a to second through holes 991d) on a surface facing the sorting unit 980, and receives game balls sent inside the sorting unit 980 from the openings. The detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 112 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 includes a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and rotation between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is mainly provided with a distributing portion 983 disposed in a possible state and a cover member 987 disposed on the rear side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distributing portion 983.

  The back base 985 is formed of a colored and translucent (blue in the present embodiment) resin material, and has a base 985a formed in a plate-like body and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating in the thickness direction of the base 985a. 985b to 985g), a concave portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a projecting portion 986e projecting from the opposite surface of the concave portion 985h. It is formed in preparation.

  The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically-elongated rectangular shape in a front view, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape at an outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity on a side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw inserted through a front base 981 described later. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw for inserting a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the rear base 985 (the distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

  The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position that overlaps a part of openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the direction of gravity. The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, the game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

  The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (front side in FIG. 109B), and is formed substantially at the center of the base 985a in the short direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109B). Is done. In addition, the concave portion 985h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a part of a distributing portion 983 described later, and includes a bearing portion 985j that protrudes in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

  The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the short direction of the base 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The openings 985b and 985c are formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981 side.

  The opening 985d is formed substantially at the center of the base 985a in the lateral direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 109B), and the position in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 109B) is substantially the same as the openings 985b and 985c. Set to position. Similarly to the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) goes to the opposite side to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981 side.

  The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. The openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity and extend in the direction of gravity, with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 of the space opening on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 of the space opening on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 mainly communicate with the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

  The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a back base 985, which will be described later, and have a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. You. This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

  The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) is communicated with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. . This allows the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

  In the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed which is recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction (the direction of gravity) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for disposing a detection device SE3 described later inside thereof, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. This allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

  In the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set to be parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially match. Placed in the position. Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 can be detected.

  In addition, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed in parallel with the direction of gravity, it is possible to easily use the own weight of the game ball when sending the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught on the connection portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Note that the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the above-described detection device SE1, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The concave portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed so as to be continuous with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thus, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

  The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows game balls to pass through. The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thus, game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and can be sent to the passage unit 990 through the space.

  The opening 985g is formed on one side (downward in the direction of gravity) of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity. Similarly to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

  The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a back base 985, which will be described later, and have a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. You. This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

  The accommodation portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies. The housing portion 986b is a portion for housing a magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the projecting dimension of the housing portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b. Further, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular bodies, even when the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semi-annular bodies are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

  The protruding portion 986e protrudes in a columnar shape from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. Further, the protruding portion 986e has a fastening hole which is concavely formed in a circular shape on the axis thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing a tip end of a screw that passes through a cover member 987 described later. The screw is screwed in a state where the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987 to fasten the cover member 987 to the rear base 985. Can be fixed.

  The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can be provided in the housing 986b to generate a magnetic field on the front base 981 side via the base 985a. Accordingly, the magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution unit 983 described later is repelled, and the distribution unit 983 can be easily displaced.

  The front base 981 is formed from a colored translucent (blue in the present embodiment) resin material. The front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 in a front view, and swells from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a toward the player (the side opposite to the rear base 986). It is formed mainly with the protrusion 982.

  The base plate 981a is formed in a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction at an outer peripheral edge thereof, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

  The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of a tip portion of the screw. .

  The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed as a pair in the short direction with a bulged portion 982 described later interposed therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with the semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the short direction of the base plate 981a.

  The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two places in the short direction of the base plate 981a. The second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulging portion 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and has a through hole 981c formed between two locations.

  The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have substantially the same inner edge shape as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. Accordingly, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

  The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and is screwed into the fastening hole 986d by inserting a screw from the front base 981 side. Thus, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

  The through hole 981c is formed so as to penetrate a square whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through-hole 981c is formed with a side wall 981b standing upright along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 (FIG. 109A). The through-hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above. When the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, the second winning opening 140 is formed. Is formed at a position overlapping the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the game ball.

  The side wall portion 981b is formed to have such a size that the standing end surface comes into contact with the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) located on the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a. It is formed to be inclined downward toward the side.

  Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 protruding from the standing front end surface. The projection 981b1 is formed at a position separated from the rolling surface 981c1 by the radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. In addition, the detailed description about the case where a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

  The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape bulging from the base plate 981a, and is set to have a size that allows a game ball to be inserted thereinside, and a game ball flowing from the inflow port 982d passes therethrough. And a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and is formed to have an inflow opening 982d formed by cutting off an upper end portion in the gravity direction, and is bent and set up at a substantially middle position in a front view toward a back base 985 side. And a plurality of recesses 982e to 982j formed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

  The inflow port 982d is cut out in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d is arranged such that, when the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, the inner edge portion is in the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930. It is formed in an overlapping position.

  The inflow port 982d is provided with a second projection 982d1 that protrudes to the opposite side from the back base 985 at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the inner edge shape of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the first projection 982d1 is formed. The second projection 982d1 is in contact with the inner edge of the concave portion 942g1.

  The distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is determined from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first throwing ball. The distance dimension to the inner edge of one side of the portion 942g in the gravity direction is set to be larger than the distance dimension to L35 (see FIG. 87B). Thereby, when the game ball sent to the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow opening 982d, the game ball is connected between the inflow opening 982d (the bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g. It can be hard to get caught in between.

  The upright wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in a front view. The standing wall 982a is formed below the inflow port 982d in the direction of gravity, and is provided with an abutting portion 982a1 that is formed above the direction of gravity in a triangular shape in the standing direction.

  The vertical wall 982a has a horizontal distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 in a space through which the first passage TR1 can pass are formed.

  The first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a distribution unit 983 described later, and game balls passing through the distribution unit 983 are sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning port 64 becomes monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

  On the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c projecting in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 is formed. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 described later, and has an inner diameter set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, the other end of the shaft member 988a can be supported by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

  In addition, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing 985j of the rear base 985. Therefore, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is connected to the bearing 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

  The contact portion 982a1 is formed on a rotation locus of a distributing unit 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotation displacement of the distributing unit 983 is regulated by the contact of the action unit 983a of the distributing unit 983. The detailed description of the contact state between the contact section 982a1 and the sorting section 983 will be described later.

  The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f.

  The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

  The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game ball can be made to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

  The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the direction in which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

  The first passage TR1 is communicated with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Accordingly, the first passage TR1 allows the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to flow therein, and allows the flowed game balls to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985.

  The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Accordingly, the first passage TR1 allows the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to flow therein, and allows the flowed game balls to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985.

  The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recess direction is set to be parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. A third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the size of the distribution unit 980 can be reduced. .

  The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and is capable of flowing the received game ball into the opening 985d of the rear base 985.

  The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), and extends so as to be inclined toward the one side of the gravity direction toward the rear base 985. In addition, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985b to the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b to flow down. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

  The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the concave portions 982h and the concave portions 982j and the inclined portions 982b, and the leading end surfaces thereof are lowered toward the rear base 985 (FIG. 109B). Inclined. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 and the guide portions 982j1, and are guided to the openings 985e and 985f. It can easily flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

  Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are caused to collide with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 while being brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985, thereby causing the game balls to be opened 985e. And into the opening 985f. Further, the standing distance of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, so that the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and the durability can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the sorting unit 980 (the throwing unit 970) is made visible to the player via the front unit 940 (the winning opening unit 930) provided on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 are difficult to visually recognize from the player side. Further, when the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the openings 985e and 985f, game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 by the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are played. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for a person to visually recognize.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed so as to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, so that the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls (game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) sent to the openings 985e and 985f can be easily recognized even in a state where the game balls pass through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the side of the back base 985 toward the downflow direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball while guiding. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

  The distribution unit 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the opposing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape in front view. In addition, the distributing portion 983 penetrates through a T-shaped one-side action portion 983a, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the action portion 983a, and a connection portion between the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. Through hole 983c, an abutting portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e formed by connecting the operating portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side. And formed mainly.

  The through hole 983c is a hole into which the shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 is inserted, and is formed slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Accordingly, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the sorting unit 983, so that the sorting unit 983 can be rotated and the front base 981 and the back base are set. It is arranged between 985 opposed sides.

  The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one side or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is moved from the front end thereof. The distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first path TR1 or the second path TR2. Further, the intermediate plate 983b is configured such that the distributing portion 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c so that the game ball is thrown from one of the first paths TR1 to the other in the second path TR2. Is controlled.

  The action portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the intermediate plate 983b extends in a front view. Further, the connection position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction) from the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. Thereby, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state where a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution unit 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

  The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to protrude outward from the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness dimension larger than the recess dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set smaller. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be disposed inside the concave portion 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is disposed between the back base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls sent from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught inside the concave portion 985h, thereby preventing the flow of the game balls from being hindered.

  In addition, the wall portion 983e is provided with a housing portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b at a radially outer end from the through hole 983c on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in a columnar body inside, and is concavely formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the rear base 985 side.

  The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet, and is disposed in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back base 985. As a result, the distribution unit 983 receives the magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back base 985, rotates the magnetic body 988c around the through-hole 983c, and moves the action part 983a in one or the other direction. Can be tilted.

  Also, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a state of being repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 has the accommodating portion 983e1. Can be suppressed. That is, since a portion that locks the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

  Note that the magnetic force of the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from magnetically attaching to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

  The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically-elongated rectangular shape in a top view, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the concave portion 985h of the rear base 985. In addition, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first concave portions 987a and second concave portions 987b which are concavely provided in a circular shape in a front view and arranged in the direction of gravity.

  The first concave portion 987a is a portion for housing the housing portion 986b of the above-described back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the housing portion 986b. Therefore, by storing the tip of the housing portion 986b in the first recess 987a in a state where the magnetic body 988b is housed inside the housing portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b housed inside the housing portion 986b is housed. It is possible to suppress the escape from the portion 986b.

  The second concave portion 987b has a through hole 987b1 on the concave bottom surface for fastening and fixing to the rear base 985. In the second concave portion 987b, the inner shape of the concave portion is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 described above. Thus, the cover member 987 can be positioned and arranged with the second concave portion 987b accommodated in the projecting portion 986e of the rear base 985, and can be screwed into the fastening hole of the projecting portion 986e via the through hole 987b1 in the positioned state. Can be concluded.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, an operation of the distribution unit 983 when a game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. FIGS. 113A and 113B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in a range CXIII of FIG. 112B. In the following, the action unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from a state of restricting the throwing of game balls to one of the first paths TR1 to a state of restricting throwing of game balls to the other of the second path TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case where the throwing of game balls to one side of the first path TR1 is restricted from the state where the throwing of game balls to the other side of the second path TR2 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a) and FIG. 113 (b), before the game ball is sent to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), the distribution to the distribution 983 is performed as described above. When the provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the second passage TR2. In addition, when the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side contacts the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981, the rotation amount is regulated (see FIG. 113A).

  When a game ball is sent to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the acting portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 113B, the distribution unit 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. It is said. It should be noted that the rotation amount is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side contacting the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. In this case, the direction of repulsion of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state in which the intermediate plate 983b acts on the first passage TR1 side.

  Accordingly, the distribution unit 983 can rotationally displace the through-hole 983c as an axis using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. In addition, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution unit 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution unit 983 can displace the tilt direction of the intermediate plate 983b and send the game ball one ball at a time to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

  Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are open on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 provided in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 for sending game balls passing therethrough, a third passage member 993 disposed on the second passage member 992 for sending game balls passing through the second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992 It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 disposed between the three passage members 993.

  The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a penetratingly formed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the distribution unit 980, and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the direction of gravity (lower in the direction of gravity). Side), a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d, which are formed on both sides in the horizontal direction of the second insertion hole 991b, and an outer periphery in a front view. And a through-hole 991f formed in a circular shape.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in a front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are continuous with each other when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls flowing down the inside of the sorting unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

  Further, in the first insertion hole 991a, an annular annular projection 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls that flow down the inside of the sorting unit 980 and pass through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

  The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows the third insertion hole 991c to receive a game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (the first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e.

  Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes a recessed portion 991c1 that is recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The concave portion 991c1 is a portion for housing the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. Accordingly, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the concave portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 is prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

  Furthermore, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 provided in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990. And the passage unit 990. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and it is possible to reduce the overall size of the throwing unit 970.

  The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is horizontally adjacent. It is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the corresponding second insertion hole 991b. Thus, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2, and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (the left direction in FIG. 114A).

  The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls that flow down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (the second passage TR2) and pass through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

  The fourth insertion hole 991d includes a recessed portion 991d1 that is recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The concave portion 991d1 is a portion for housing the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 provided in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. Thereby, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the concave portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 is prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

  Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and has an inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) in the horizontal direction. And is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. This allows the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d to collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and to roll in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114A).

  The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in a front view, and penetrates on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and a fifth insertion hole thereof. The second insertion hole 922 is mainly provided with a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the second insertion hole 922, and an upright wall 992a standing upright on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

  The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, a game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

  The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993. The standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993. Thus, the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (the right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

  The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d projecting in the horizontal direction and a projecting wall 992e projecting in the horizontal direction from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that projects in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 described later and the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 is inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the upright wall 992a. Accordingly, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from falling out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

  The protruding wall 992e is formed on both sides in the horizontal direction of the standing wall 992a so as to protrude in a semicircular shape in a front view, and has a through hole 992e1 penetrating through the axis of the semicircle. The protruding wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thus, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw from the second passage member 992 side into the through hole 992e1 and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

  The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. You. Thus, a game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

  A guide wall 992c1 is provided around the sixth insertion hole 992c so as to be erected toward the third passage member 993. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and an end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction, and is connected to the gravity. And a second wall 992c3 extending in the direction.

  The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces on which the detection device SE4 is disposed, and are located between the upright wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed in the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions at the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

  The detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thus, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

  The second passage member 992 includes an annular protrusion 992f protruding from the sixth passage hole 992c in the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 114A) on the third passage member 993 side. The annular projection 992f is provided with a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in a front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are continuous with each other when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls flowing down the inside of the sorting unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

  The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

  Further, in the first insertion hole 991a, an annular annular projection 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls that flow down the inside of the sorting unit 980 and pass through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

  The second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

  The third passage member 993 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long in a front view. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed to penetrate at a substantially middle position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b standing upright from an edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly includes an upright wall 993e erected from the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion 993c recessed in the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

  The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape whose one side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined with each other so as to be continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 provided in the second passage member 992. Thus, game balls that have passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

  The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. The guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (downward inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992). Is done. Thereby, the game ball sent to the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the opposite side (the right side in FIG. 114 (b)) from the second passage member 992 side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 114B, the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 114B). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 114B), the third passage member 993 can be disposed closer to the upright wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the above-mentioned sorting unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced.

  When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the upright wall 993e has a distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 facing the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

  Further, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity is formed on the upstream side (the second passage member 992 side) where game balls are thrown. This makes it easier to insert a game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

  That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (the second passage member 992 side) where the game balls are thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the height of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a and the rolling surface from being displaced. As a result, a game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

  The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and has a bent portion 993d1 bent at the protruding tip thereof toward the second passage member 992. In the state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall 992c3 facing the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. Is set substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis. Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

  The concave portion 993c is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 992f. It is formed in a larger inner edge shape. In addition, the concave portion 993c has a through hole 993c1 formed on the concave bottom surface coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f. Accordingly, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and a screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1, thereby forming the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

  According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are formed. Is arranged on the back side (opposite to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the game unit. By exchanging the throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and disposing another unit, a game flowing down the game area is provided. A different game mode can be achieved without affecting the flow of the ball.

  With reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, another unit (exchange unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described. FIG. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. FIG. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 along the line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-section of the exchange unit 1980 along the line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118 (a). FIG. The same parts as those of the above-described distribution unit 980 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the game area side and a rear base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 from the game area side. It is formed in preparation for.

  The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 bulging from the base plate 981a to the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

  In addition, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 (in this embodiment, yellow). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is provided on the game board 13.

  That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having the specification in which the distribution unit 980 is provided and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) in which the replacement unit 1980 is provided are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, since both specifications have the same shape of the game area (the front surface of the game board 13), where it is difficult for the player to determine which specification, the color arrangement of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 is different. This makes it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (the pachinko machine 10).

  The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in a front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specification is changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set up. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 in accordance with the specification change by exchanging the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape bulging from the base plate 1981a, and is set to have a size that allows a game ball to be inserted thereinside. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting off the upper end in the direction of gravity.

  The width of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and allows the game ball flowing from the inflow port 982d to pass through the inside and flow down. . In addition, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is set at a position in the direction of gravity substantially the same as the inner surface of one side in the direction of gravity of the opening 985d formed in the back base 1985. As a result, game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be sent to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inflow port 982d.

  The outer shape of the rear base 1985 in a front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the rear base 985 of the distribution unit 980, and communicates with the opening 985d communicating with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982 and the internal space of the through hole 981c. And an opening 985g.

  According to the replacement unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in a front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. Exchange (change of specifications) can be easily performed.

  Here, a game provided with a ball entry unit provided with a ball entrance formed to allow game balls to enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board provided with the ball entry unit Machines are known. According to such a gaming machine, the specifications of the gaming machine can be changed while the game board is diverted (shared) by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages). it can. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is disposed on the front of the game board, for example, it is necessary to previously secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages on the front of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that a space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the sorting unit 980 (ball entry unit) has the inflow port 982d, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d, and the game board 13 A winning opening unit 930 provided on the front side, and a winning opening unit 930 is provided on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 and connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13 because the passage unit 990 is provided, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. No need. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the exchange unit 1980, the game board 13 (the base plate 60 and the front unit 940) is diverted (also used) and the specification of the game board 13 is changed. Space can be used effectively.

  Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the winning opening unit. At the same time, since the distribution unit 980 is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to a player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light-transmitting material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a plywood plate. Then, a seal is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since the base plate 60 can be painted, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed from a colored translucent (light transmitting material) resin material, the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 flows down the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the front unit 940. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed from a colored translucent (light transmitting material) resin material. Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship between the sorting unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction). That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction and flows down, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed to include a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, the distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the first path TR1 and the second path TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a gaming machine having different specifications by changing from the sorting unit 980 having a large number of passages of the game balls to the replacement unit 1980, it is possible to suppress an operator from mistakenly arranging the number of the detecting devices SE3.

  That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed downstream of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed by the passage of the distribution unit 980. When the downflow path is changed from the distribution unit 980 formed of two to the one exchange unit 1980, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of the downflow paths of the distribution unit 980 is sufficient. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 may be provided by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection devices SE3 are arranged in the path branched from the ball-sending path TR0, when the sorting unit 980 is changed to the exchange unit 1980, the number of the detection devices SE3 according to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a worker from mistakenly arranging the number.

  On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is provided in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices provided in the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased accordingly.

  In the exchange unit 1980, a side wall 981b is formed at the same position as the distribution unit 980, for feeding game balls flowing from the second winning port 140. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the replacement unit 1980 is disposed on the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned using the side wall 981b. That is, irrespective of the form of the exchange unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same, so that by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a, the replacement unit 1980 However, the positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

  Further, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) at the connecting portion between the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of displacement (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case where other portions are positioned. As a result, the game balls can flow down smoothly.

  Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. A01.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the connection of the respective passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 is in a state of abutting in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the protrusion formed on the throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

  More specifically, the second ball projection 942g and the inflow port 982d are provided with a second protrusion 982d1 formed in the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first ball feeding section 942g. Further, the projection 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is disposed inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

  Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 980 are provided in an internal space surrounded by the arm 962e and the wall 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

  Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member provided on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member connected to the first passage of the first member. A game machine having two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board is known. The game ball flowing down on the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member flows into the second passage of the second member after passing through the first passage, and the second side of the game board, Pass through two passages. Thereby, the passage route of the game ball is changed in the front-back direction, and it is possible to give the player interest.

  In this case, if a positional shift (step) occurs in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, and the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is secured. Is required to do so. However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, in addition to the first member, various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a positioning hole for positioning each of the members is provided on the game board. In the forming step, the positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed, while the positioning hole for positioning the second member is formed on the back surface of the game board by inverting the game board. Above, a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required, which is not practical.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are located between the protruding portions 962g of the drive unit 960. The wall 942d is inserted. When the throwing unit 970 is disposed on the front unit 940, the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 970 is inserted between the arm 962e where the projection 962g is projected.

  That is, the drive unit 960 includes a projecting portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the throwing unit 970. And Thus, the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

  The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located outside of the pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the facing direction. As a result, the arm 962e of the guide 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm 962e is engaged with the side wall 981b of the ball sending unit 970, respectively. The positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the 940 can be performed effectively. That is, the positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) at the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide portion 962b (arm portion 962e), so that the other portions are positioned by the guide portion 962b. The occurrence of displacement (step) can be effectively suppressed.

  The drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being disposed on the front unit 940. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the drive unit 960. That is, the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, so that the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly. In addition, product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) on the front unit 940 including the second throwing portion 942c. When each of the throwing units 970 is attached, there is no need to separately attach the drive unit 960, and by attaching the front unit 940, the attachment of the drive unit 960 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the attachment can be improved accordingly.

  When the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the protrusion 962g and the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. You. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the operation of engaging the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

  Further, in a state where the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engageable with the ball sending unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  As described above, the wall 962f is connected between the pair of arms 962e facing each other, and when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm 962e, the wall 962f, and the front unit 940 are connected. The above-described displacement member 966 is disposed between the rear base 941 and the rear base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is disposed at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the projection 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is inserted, in the opening direction. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 is blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and it is possible to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the protruding portion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of wing members.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, a connection state of the connection between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXXb of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board 13 in -CXXb line. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). You.

  As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the distance L38 between the projection 981b1 and the second concave notch 942c1 and the rolling surface 981c1 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

  Here, a game having a first passage member through which a game ball passes, and a second passage member having an upstream end connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes. Machines are known. However, in such a structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, displacement between the two cannot be avoided. Therefore, the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member are not connected. There is a problem that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the game ball, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  The winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60 as described above. Therefore, if an error occurs in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 may be separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120A). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the projection 981b1 are formed at different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, so that the game ball is formed at the step on the bottom side. And the timing of passing through the step on the side surface can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side, and to disperse those effects, so that the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 121, a gap K1 of a space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second ball sending portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the game ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second ball sending portion. The gap K2 of the space formed between the second concave notch 942c1 of the 942c and the projection 981b1 of the side wall 981b is formed at a position different in the rolling direction of the game ball (left and right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). . Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game ball rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

  Next, a displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly has been described. However, the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment is provided on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 8966, It has a recess 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L-shape in rear view. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in a front view, and has a second opening 966c formed at a substantially central position in a front view in a plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is disposed in the front unit 940, the second opening 966c is inside the second opening 966c. Two winning ports 140 are arranged.

  Further, the displacement member 8966 includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the short side direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ) And a bulging portion 966b bulging from the rear side (the front side in FIG. 122).

  The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides in the short direction of the displacement member 8966 and extending in the longitudinal direction. Prepare.

  The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted. The sliding groove 8966a2 extends in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and the concave portion 8966a6 is formed on the outside in the short direction with the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side (the upper side in FIG. 122).

  The width of the concave portion 8966a6 in the short direction is set to be larger than the maximum size between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b. Further, the side surface on the moving side of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (the horizontal direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the same as that of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. The first surface 945b1 is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

  Therefore, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, at least a part of the projection 945b can be accommodated inside the concave portion 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the concave portion 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by being brought into contact.

  On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity), so that the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is recessed 8966a6. Can be pulled out from the inside. Accordingly, the protrusion 945b can be displaced by bringing the protrusion 945b into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2.

  That is, when the driving force is transmitted from the wing member 945, the transmission of the driving force to the transmitting member 965 can be restricted, and when the driving force is transmitted from the transmitting member 965, the protrusion 945 b and the concave portion 8966 a6 can be prevented. And the projection 945b can be displaced. As a result, the forcible opening of the wing member 945 from the outside can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). In addition, since the concave portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the upper side on the other side (gravity direction) in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b can be received with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the concave portion 8966a6 can be easily maintained by utilizing the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 8966.

  Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has been described with the distal end disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is described. Is projected from the connection hole 966b1. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 123A and 123B are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) correspond to FIG. 96 (a). Further, FIG. 123 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 123 (b) shows the closed state of the wing member 945 which has been fraudulently operated (forcibly opened) by the player to change from the closed state to the open state. The state of engagement in the middle of the displacement is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 according to the ninth embodiment is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a distal end 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end 9965a. And a rotating part 965b that is connected to and extends toward the connecting member 964.

  The width of the tip 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases, as in the seventh embodiment. In addition, the distal end portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the coupling hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end thereof, and a vertical projection (lower in the gravity direction) from the coupling side with the rotating shaft 965c. It is formed to include the setting portion 965f.

  The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape in a front view smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted through the inside of the connection hole 966b1, and the end of the distal end has a connection hole. Projected from 966b1. The insertion portion 9966e protrudes from the connection hole 966b1 to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity), and bulges from the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) to the inner surface side of the connection hole 966b1. It is formed to have a bulging portion 965e1.

  The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is formed at a position separating a slight gap from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 is brought into contact with the contact surface 9965e4 for transmission. The displacement of the member 9965 can be regulated.

  More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the one-side contacted portion 966b2 of the connection hole 966b1 contacts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y by the rotational displacement, and is also displaced toward the rotating shaft 965c. Accordingly, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. Accordingly, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, and thus the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is similarly regulated.

  On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connection member 964 is displaced), the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are connected to each other by rotating the transmission member 965 earlier than the displacement member 966. Contact can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965.

  As described above, the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, so that the rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  That is, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment includes the insertion portion 9965e and the engagement portion 9965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and displaces the displacement member 966 with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e contacts the other contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engagement portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged. As a result, the forcible opening of the wing member 945 from the outside can be suppressed.

  Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has only the tip disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described. However, in the tenth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 10965 is inserted. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connection hole 10966b. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in each of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 124A and 124B are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, FIG. 124 (a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) illustrates the opened state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a distal end portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end portion 10965a. And a rotating part extending toward the connecting member 964 side.

  The width of the tip 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases, as in the seventh embodiment. The distal end portion 10965a is provided at an end thereof with an insertion portion 10965e inserted into a connection hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966 described later, and protrudes from the connection side with the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction). And an upright portion 965f.

  The insertion portion 10965e is formed such that the outer shape in a front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted inside the connection hole 10966b. The insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 protruding from one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and a swelling portion bulging out from the other side (upper side in the direction of gravity) to the inner surface side of the connection hole 966b1. 964d1.

  The engagement portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a concave portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966 described later when the wing member 945 is closed. In addition, the displacement member 10966 includes a contact surface 10965e4 on a side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. When the wing member 945 is closed, the contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966 described below with a predetermined gap therebetween.

  The displacement member 10966 is formed of a plate-like body that is horizontally long and rectangular in a front view, and has a second opening 966c formed at a substantially central position in a front view in a plate thickness direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 124A). The second opening 966c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941, and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. It is arranged in. Thus, it is possible to suppress a game ball sent to the opposite side of the game area via the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

  In addition, the displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding in the short direction from one end in the longitudinal direction, a protruding portion 966b protruding from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the back side, and a surface opposite to the protruding portion 966b. It mainly includes a concave portion 10966d to be concavely provided.

  The concave portion 10966d is provided in a concave shape in connection with the other contacted portion 966b3 of the connection hole 966b1, and has a contact surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the side of the bulging portion 966b. When the wing member 945 is closed, the contact surface 10966d1 is formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965, and a slight gap is formed between the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10965e4. They are arranged facing each other at a distance. The contact surface 10966d1 has an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connection hole 966b1.

  The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined rearward toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inward of the abutted surface 10966d1 about the rotation axis 965c.

  In the tenth embodiment, the distance between the opposing portion 966b3 of the connection hole 966b1 and the opposing portion 966b2 of the one-side abutted portion 966b2 is equal to the length of the insertion portion when the wing member 945 is closed when viewed from the front. The width L39 in the direction of gravity of 10965e is set to be larger than the width L39 (see FIG. 124A). Thereby, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the rear side, and the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are in contact with each other, so that the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is regulated. Can be suppressed.

  According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connection member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Is done. Accordingly, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved about the axis of the rotation shaft 965c. , The contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state in which the contact surface 10966d1 is slightly separated from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interference.

  As described above, the distance between the opposing portions 966b3 of the connection hole 966b1 and the one-side abutted portion 966b2 is larger than the width L36 of the transmission member 10965. By rotating the 10965, the insertion portion 10965e provided inside the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be put out of the concave portion 10966d. Thus, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 is brought into contact with the other-side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

  When displacing the pair of wing members 945 from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1. This allows the engaging portion 10965e3 to be displaced inside the concave portion 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity).

  On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid while the engagement portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Accordingly, the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced in accordance with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, and the rotational displacement displaces the engaging portion 10965e3 to the rear side. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contact surface 10966d1 of the concave portion 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is regulated. As a result, the forcible opening of the wing member 945 from the outside can be suppressed.

  That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes the insertion portion 10965e and the engagement portion 10965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contact portion is provided. One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity is in contact with 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side abutted portion 966b3 is on the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity (the bulging portion). When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the transmission member 965e1) abuts, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the displacement is performed without rotating the transmission member 10965. Sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcedly maintained from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to a position where the engagement portion 10965e3 is protruded from the inside of the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966 to the outside, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the direction of gravity, the displacement member 10966 can be slid toward the other side in the direction of gravity, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

  Next, a displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. Is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment. FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. FIG. 126 (a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) illustrates the opened state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 according to the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b extend in the gravity direction on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140. In the eleventh embodiment, the distal end position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the second throwing portions 942c is set to be substantially the same as the protruding distal end position of the second throwing portion 942c.

  The pair of second guide walls 11942b has a first tooth surface 11942b1 of a gear tooth surface formed on the opposite side surface. Further, the distance between the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set to be greater than the width dimension of the later-described displacement member 11966 in the horizontal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 126A), and the displacement member 11966 is provided between the opposed second guide walls 11942b. Is arranged.

  The first gear 1112b1 meshes with a first gear GY1 that is supported by a displacement member 11966 described later. Accordingly, the first gear GY1 meshing with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated by the sliding displacement of the displacement member 11966.

  The displacement member 11966 is formed of a first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a second member 11968 disposed to be displaceable on the first member 11967, and an axis formed on the first member 11968. The first gear GY1 is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

  In the first member 11967, a second opening 966c is formed at a substantially central position in a front view so as to penetrate in the thickness direction. Further, the first member 11967 includes a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second opening 966c. It is formed to have a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the short direction sandwiched therebetween.

  The support portion 11966d is provided so as to protrude toward the first member 11967, and has a tip inserted into a shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Thus, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

  The sliding protrusion 11966e is provided to protrude toward the first member 11968, and the tip is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Thereby, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

  The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material on a substantially gate-shaped plate in a front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left and right directions in FIG. 126 (a)). A sliding groove 11968b formed in the plate thickness direction in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (FIG. 126 (a) vertical direction), and a horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the gate shape And a blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face that is extended.

  The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal side surfaces of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

  As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid with respect to the first member 11968 by the distance between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

  Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

  The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967, and the lower end thereof is lower than the inner surface of the second throwing portion 942c at the other end in the gravity direction when the wing member 945 is closed. , On the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140.

  Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length in contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the distal end position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second throwing portions 942c is set to substantially the same position as the distal end position of the second throwing portion 942c. Thus, the foreign matter inserted into the second winning opening 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface, the blade portion, and the 11968c flowing from the second winning opening 140.

  According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is closed, the blade 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. In addition, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut by an unauthorized operation in a state in which the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 because it can be disposed below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement of the game ball entering from the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 11966.

  On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, so that the second member 11968 is displaced. The displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the displacement of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941 as described above. Can be separated from the rolling portion 943a serving as the rolling surface by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the flow of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140.

  That is, the second member 11968 traverses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since the blade portion is provided so as to rub against the portion (ends of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegally inserted illegally from the second winning port 140 into the rolling path of the game ball. Can be.

  For example, a detecting device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that attaches the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning port 140, passes through the rolling portion 943a, and detects the passage of the game ball. ), The other end of the thread is operated (pulled out or pulled) while the game ball is reciprocated, so that the detection device SE4 detects a plurality of times. According to the eleventh embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters while the wing member 945 is opened, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed according to the eleventh embodiment. When 11966 (the second member 11968) is slid and the blade 11968c crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c, the middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is cut into the blade 11968c. And pressed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, and when the blade portion 11968c rubs against the edge of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the The yarn can be cut between the rolling portion 943a and the edge of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  Next, a displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described. Is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment. FIGS. 128A and 128B are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. In addition, FIG. 128A illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128B illustrates the opened state of the wing member 945.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b extend in the gravity direction on both horizontal outer sides of the second winning opening 140. In the twelfth embodiment, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a is set to be short, and the projecting tip surface is set to a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. You.

  Further, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 are provided on both outer sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are respectively inserted through shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2 described later, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

  The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 protruding in the facing direction at one end side (the lower side in the gravity direction) of the facing side surface in the gravity direction. The distance between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width of the first member 12967 described later in the lateral direction. Thus, the first member 12967 can be provided between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

  The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, a second member 12968 arranged to be displaceable on the first member 12967, and a back support 941. The first gear GY1 is meshed with the first member 12967, and the second gear GY2 is journaled on the rear base 941 and meshes with the second member 12968.

  The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface. As described above, the first gear GY1 is rotatably supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the rear base 941, and the tooth surface thereof is formed by the first member 12967 and the second gear. GY2 is engaged.

  The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two-stage gears having different sizes, and is formed to include a small-diameter small-diameter gear GY2a and a large-diameter large-diameter gear GY2b. The second gear GY2 is supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small-diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 and the tooth of the large-diameter gear GY2b. The surface is meshed with the second member 12968.

  The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c formed at a substantially central position in a front view so as to penetrate in the thickness direction. Further, the first member 12967 includes a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second opening 12966c. A sliding projection 12966e is provided on the both sides in the short direction across the 12966c, and is provided with a third tooth surface 12966f of a gear tooth surface on both sides extending in the longitudinal direction.

  The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 12966c when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. The second opening 12966c has a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

  The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side to a second member 12968 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, and the pair of wing members 945 are In the opened state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

  The sliding protrusion 12966e is provided so as to protrude toward the second member 12968, and the tip is inserted into the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Thereby, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

  The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. Thereby, the first member G91 of the first gear GY1 is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, so that the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

  The second member 12968 is formed of a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body as viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extending portions oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). In addition, the second member 12968 is provided along the second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outer side in the direction opposite to the pair of extending portions, and along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). And a sliding groove 12968b formed in an elongated hole shape in the thickness direction, and a blade portion 6683 on an end surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of a connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions. Is done.

  As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in a long hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12966 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the direction of gravity with respect to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e.

  The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 meshes with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a. Therefore, when the second gear GY2 is rotated, the second member 12968 is slid. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the sliding movement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be displaced with the displacement of the first member 12967.

  The sliding direction of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12968 is set to be large by the amount of the small-diameter second gear GY2.

  The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967, and the upper end thereof is on one side of the second throwing portion 942c in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) when the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is disposed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) with respect to the inner surface of (). That is, the second member 12968 is disposed at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 in a front view in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

  Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pair of wing members 945 traverse the rolling paths of the game balls of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c and rub each other edge portions. Since the first member 12966 and the second member 12968 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made, it is possible to cut an illegally inserted illegally into the passage from the second winning opening 140. it can.

  For example, the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, such a game ball is made to enter from the second winning port 140, and at the same time is passed through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball sending portion 942c, and the detecting device SE4 In the state where the game ball reaches the detection position, there is a fraudulent act of operating the other end of the thread (pulling out and pulling) to reciprocate the game ball, thereby causing the detection device SE4 to detect the game ball a plurality of times. According to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters while the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the present invention displaces the pair of wing members 945 from the open position to the closed position. When the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is moved between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. Can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second member 12968 is located on the other side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball whose blade portion 6683 has entered the second winning opening 140. Be placed. As described above, when the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can pass between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 can be closed by the first member 12967 and the second member 12968, so that the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is set to the eleventh. It can be smaller than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 is closed flows into the rolling path. Can be suppressed.

  Next, a drive unit 13960 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the transmission of the drive from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is performed through the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmitting member 965, and the displacement member 966 is described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 is transmitted. Is transmitted to the wing member 945 by one member. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129 (a). Note that in FIG. 129 (b), the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a dashed line only in its outer shape for easy understanding. In the thirteenth embodiment, the pair of wing members 945 is closed when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, and the shaft portion 961b projects from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are opened.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the thirteenth embodiment is disposed on the back side (the right side in FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and sets the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 to gravity. 129 (b). In addition, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

  The transmission member 13965 is provided with a base 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 toward the front unit 940, and an erect member from the end of the base 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945. An engagement portion 13965j is formed.

  An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at an end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Thus, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slid.

  The engagement portion 13965j is formed at a position that overlaps with the projection 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in rear view (or front view). The upright dimension of the engaging portion 13965j is set to be longer than the length of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and the engaging portion 13965j overlaps the protrusion 945b in a front view.

  A substantially C-shaped support portion 13965j1 in a side view is projected from a standing end of the engaging portion 13965j. The support portion 13965j1 has a dimension between the opposing sides inside the opening set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the direction in which the pair of engagement portions 13965j oppose each other (the horizontal direction in FIG. 129 (a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the projection 945b can be provided inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

  Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the projection 945b is displaced with the displacement. By displacing the projection 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

  According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are disposed on the rear side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (the second winning opening 140). In other words, the space for disposing the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 is concentrated on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space for disposing other members and devices is reduced to the pair of wing members 945 (second winning). The space can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), so that the space can be effectively utilized.

  Next, a displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 when viewed from the front is described. The case where the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 130 (a) and 131 (a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXIb-CXXXIb in FIG. 131 (a). FIG.

  In FIGS. 130 (a) and 131 (a), the outer shapes of the pair of wing members 945 are shown by chain lines. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show the closed state of the pair of wing members 945. In FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut. The opened state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the operation is performed is illustrated. Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in a front view, and has a second opening 966c at a substantially central position in a front view. Penetration is formed in the thickness direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 130B).

  The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (the upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) and in the lateral direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 130 (a)). A bulging portion 14966b bulging from the end side (the lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the rear side (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

  The bulging portion 14966b is formed so as to bulge toward the rear side (the rear base 941 side), and a horizontally-long rectangular connection hole 14966b1 is formed at an inner portion in a rear view. The connection hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

  The shape of the inner edge of the connection hole 14966b1 when viewed from the front is set to be substantially square, and the connection hole 14966b1 is in contact with one contacted portion 966b2 of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 130A)). And the other contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90A)).

  The connection hole 14966b1 is formed such that the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the direction of gravity (the other-side contacted portion 966b3 to the one-side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the direction of gravity. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e contacts the other contacted portion 966b3.

  The connecting hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (the other contacted portion 966b3 to the one contacted portion 14966b2). (L40−L41)> (L42−Game Ball) The distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is smaller than the size obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball. Diameter). Thus, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity), the rolling path of the game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140 can be closed at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

  Next, a case where the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, the separation distance L40 of the connection hole 14966b1 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the direction of gravity, and when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the other side cover is closed. Since the insertion portion 965e is in contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the projection 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut, the one-side contact is made. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

  As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set such that the size obtained by subtracting the width L41 from the distance L40 is larger than the size obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). Since the displacement member 14966 is freely dropped, the rolling path of the game ball flowing from the second winning port 140 can be closed by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

  That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are not communicated with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131A and 131B), the displacement member 14966 is used. Is disposed in the path of the game ball flowing from the second winning opening 140, so that, for example, even if the projection 945b of the wing member 945 is cut to forcibly open the wing member 945 from the outside, the second The downward movement of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

  Next, a drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 is disposed and positioned outside the side wall 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described. However, in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm 15962j is It is arranged and positioned inside the part 981b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. FIG. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133 (a). FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

  First, the drive unit 15960 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment includes a first housing 15962 and a second housing 963 which are formed in a box shape and are disposed to face each other, and a first housing 15962 and a first housing 15962. A solenoid 610 disposed in a space between the second housing portions 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 which is pivotally supported by the first housing portion 15962 and the second housing portion 963. And a transmission member 965 connected to the main body.

  The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a cover portion 962a that covers one side (the upper side in FIG. 132A) of the solenoid 610, and a back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) from the cover portion 962a. And a guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference portion.

  The drive unit 15960 is disposed in a space between the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963 formed in a box shape and disposed to face each other, and the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963. It mainly includes a solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. Is done.

  The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side (the upper side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610, and a portion from the covering portion 962a to the rear base 941 side (FIG. 85). And a guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference portion.

  The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arms 15962e formed substantially in an L shape in a side view, a pair of arms 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a front view portal shape, and the wall portion 962f. 962f, a projecting portion 962g projecting from the opposite side of the covering portion 962a (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125)), and a pair of arm portions 15962e, which are located on the other side in the direction of gravity, and project from the wall portion 962f. And a third arm 15962h projecting from the opposite side of the second arm 15962j across the wall 962f.

  The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the back base 941 (see FIG. 85), and bends the protruding tip side toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L-shape. The arm 15962e has a protruding position in the direction of gravity set below the side wall 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

  The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge of the wall portion 962f, and a distance dimension L43 between the pair of opposed portions is set smaller than a width dimension between the opposed portions of the pair of arm portions 962e. At the same time, it is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second arm portion 15962j is set such that the distance dimension in the gravity direction is set smaller than the distance between the side walls 981b of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction, and in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall part 981b.

  In addition, the distance dimension of the pair of second arm portions 15962j on the outside in the facing direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side walls 981b in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, when the sorting unit 980 (the throwing unit 970) is provided in the winning opening unit 930, the positioning can be performed by arranging the second arm 15962j inside the side wall 981b.

  The distance dimension between the third arm portions 15962h facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing arm portions 15962e. Further, a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the end of the second arm 15962j on the rear base 941 side is formed in the third arm 15962h.

  In the protruding portion 15962h1, the protruding distance from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. The protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

  Accordingly, the upstream end of the protruding portion 15962h1 and the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the timing and the side surface at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom side are formed. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the game balls are simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface, and to disperse the influence of the play, so that the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can perform both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and a part of the passage of the game ball flowing from the second winning port 140. Becomes Therefore, the distribution unit 980 can easily allow the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is disposed inside the second concave notch 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c is provided. Of the side wall portion 16981b is disposed inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 134 (a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment has a standing tip end surface with the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 mounted on the base plate. 930 is formed so as to be in contact with the tip of the second throwing portion 16942c.

  In addition, the side wall portion 16981b includes a concave notch portion 16981b2 that is concavely provided on the vertical end surface on the vertical end surface. The concave notch 16981b2 is formed at a position separated from the rolling surface 981c1 by the radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and has a concave shape in a side view, and a shape in a side view of a projection 16942c2 of a second throwing portion 16942c described later. Is set substantially the same as.

  Thereby, when a game ball is thrown from the end face 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. In addition, the detailed description about the case where a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

  Further, the concave notch 16981b2 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b at the base end of the standing position is formed to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

  That is, in the sixteenth embodiment, since the concave front end surface of the concave notch 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, the game ball that collides with the concave front end surface of the concave notch 16981b2. Can be pressed against the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping up and bouncing on the concave front end face of the concave notch 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to easily pass (flow down) the game ball.

  The projection 16942c2 is formed so as to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in a side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is notched 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. Can be suppressed from being caught in the inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (fall) from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. And the timing of passing through the step on the side surface can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side, and to disperse those effects, so that the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the sixteenth embodiment, since the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball and the projection 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, the downstream end of the side surface of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion are formed. The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. In other words, when the side upstream end of the second throwing portion 942c is formed at a position different from the bottom upstream end of the rolling portion 943a on the downstream side in the game ball passing direction, the side upstream of the side wall portion 16981b is formed. Until the game ball reaches the end, the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 942c can guide the game ball. Therefore, the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly.

  On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 is relatively weak in rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the sixteenth embodiment, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side of the game ball in the passage direction of the game ball, the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, it is possible to maintain the state in which the position of the bottom surface upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b is made different in the passing direction of the game ball, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the timing of the side surface The timing of passing through the step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface, and to disperse the influence of the game balls, so that the game balls smoothly flow down (pass). be able to.

  Further, since the projection 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the concave portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side of the concave portion 16981b2 is brought into contact with the projection 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a is formed. Of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction can be restricted. That is, at a step where the bottom end of the side wall 16981b is higher than the bottom end of the bottom of the rolling part 943a, the game ball is likely to jump up when climbing. Compared to the reverse step, it is easier to hinder smooth flow (passing) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the game ball to smoothly flow down that the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b can be prevented from being displaced upward in the gravity direction from the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the end of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throw portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in side view. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in side view. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 134 (b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the seventeenth embodiment is formed such that the front end surface 17981b3 of the standing front end is inclined downward from the base end side toward the front end side. . In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

  On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed such that the tip end surface 17942c3 of the protruding tip end surface is inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Will be arranged.

  Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (front end surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. As compared with the case of (Seventh Embodiment), the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side wall 17981b can be slid along the slope and hardly rebounded. As a result, it is possible to easily pass (flow down) the game ball.

  In addition, since the entirety of the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, for example, as compared with a case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed to have a concave notch 16981b2 as in the sixteenth embodiment. In addition, the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed of a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be moderated, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. Improvement can be achieved.

  Next, a displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described. However, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second embodiment. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball that enters from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  135 (a), 136 (a), and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the eighteenth embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 135 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb in FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137 (a).

  135 illustrates a closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 illustrates an opened state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 illustrates a state where the pair of wing members 945 are forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) show only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning opening 140. 135 (b), 136 (b), and 137 (b), only the pair of wing members 945, the back base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. You.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 135 (a)) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that is bent substantially in an L-shape in a rear view, and extends from the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 extending in the direction of gravity and the lower end of the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 in the direction of gravity. A transmission portion 18966a7 that is bent and extended to the center in the left-right direction.

  When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the displacement member 18966 has the through hole 966c1 disposed below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. Thus, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, it is possible to restrict the flow of the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the ball sending unit 970.

  Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that is inclined toward the front side as it goes downward on the inner peripheral edge of the through hole 966c1 on the upper side in the gravity direction. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding front end of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding front end of the second throwing portion 942c. That is, in a rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at positions overlapping each other.

  In the transmission member 18958 in the eighteenth embodiment, the rotation range of the distal end portion 965a is set to be larger when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension in the direction of gravity on the side of the leading end 965a is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in rear view. The opening of the mouth 140 can be arranged.

  When the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. As for the sliding of the projection 945b inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmitting portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmitting portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the projection 945b relative to the back base 942 changes when the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 slides. It slides inside the non-transmission part 18966a6 without being performed. On the other hand, when sliding the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7 and is displaced (rotated). Accordingly, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

  Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, it is possible to allow the game balls passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portions 943a into the through holes 981c of the ball sending unit 970.

  On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are changed from the open state to the closed state, the projection 945b of the wing member 945 slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, so that the wing member 945 is rotated. In this case, as described above, the displacement member 18966 has the blade portion 18966g disposed below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface has the protruding tip end of the rolling portion 943a and Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, a second prize is formed between the blade portion 18966g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c with the operation of displacing downward in the direction of gravity. It is possible to cut the biasing object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140.

  That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slid and displaced from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the displacement member 18966 traverses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140, Since the blade portion 18966g is provided so as to rub against the edge of the passage (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the end of the second throwing portion 942c), it is illegally inserted from the second winning port 140 into the passage of the game ball. Momentum can be cut.

  For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) that attaches the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning port 140, passes through the rolling portion 943a, and detects the passage of the game ball. In the state where the game ball has reached (see), the other end of the thread is operated (extended and pulled) to cause the game ball to reciprocate, thereby causing the detecting device SE4 to detect a plurality of times. According to the eighteenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters while the wing member 945 is opened, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. When 18966g is slid and the blade 18966g crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second throwing part 942c, the middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the blade 18966g to roll. Part 943a or the edge of the second throwing part 942c, and when 18966g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling part 943a and the second throwing part 942c, 18966g and the rolling part 943a or the second throwing part 942c. Can be cut between the edges of the thread. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, when the projection 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (folded) by a player's misconduct, the through-hole of the displacement member 18966 is provided to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Accordingly, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the displacement of the game ball entering from the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 18966.

  In this case, the transmission member 18965 is urged by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the distal end portion 18965a is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in a direction to close the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are forcibly opened due to a player's misconduct, the displacement member 18966 can be similarly prevented from being forcibly opened. As a result, fraudulent acts of the player can be suppressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 includes a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 disposed on the substrate member 652 has been described. It is not limited, and the total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be three or less, or may be five or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and only the first block 653 or only the second block 654 may be used.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is disposed on the front of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the rear has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be provided on the front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from an opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed from a light-transmitting material has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

  For example, the back surface 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of a permeable material. In this case, by the layer of the non-transmissive material, it is possible to suppress light emitted from another device in the game area from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of the non-transmissive material.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not made incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from the other device is output. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In this case, the layer formed of the non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or between the layer of the non-transmissive material and the layer of the transmissive material. It is preferable to interpose a metal material or a flexible material having high reflectivity. This makes it easier for the light incident from the LED 651 to the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 to be reflected by the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 is strengthened, so that the pattern or the pattern can clearly appear.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. However, for example, a seal of a member (for example, silver foil, aluminum, or the like) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance. (For example, white).

  In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from another device in the game area from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by the seal or the printing. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a seal or printing.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not made incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from the other device is output. It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by the seal or the printing. As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 is strengthened, so that the pattern or the pattern can clearly appear.

  When a seal is attached, the seal may be attached to the gear member 630 so as to protrude from the rear surface 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 to the outer edge side. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is used. It may be interposed.

  In this case, light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is reliably totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance, and may be allowed to travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (light amount) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and to increase the light reflected by the reflector 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620, Patterns and patterns can be clearly emerged.

  Further, with the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance, it is possible to prevent light emitted from another device in the game area from being incident on the projection plate member 3620. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having high reflectance.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), light from another device is projected on the projection plate member 3620. It is possible to prevent a pattern or a pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, It may be a leaf spring. The mounting method is exemplified by a mode in which the projection 852 and the projection 823 are connected and mounted, or a mode in which the projection 852 and the projection 823 are mounted between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support 821 of the base member 820.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated about the shaft hole 851 formed at one end as an axis has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. 850 may be one that slides and displaces a guide groove formed in the front base 820. Note that, in this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction is similar to the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthogonal projection motion of a constant-velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 has been described. However, for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be provided at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630 and 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640 and 3640, and the projection plate is formed. A pattern or pattern can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is set to a position not facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (ie, the light irradiation of the LED 651). The surface is disposed at a position different from the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 in the front-rear direction. The parts may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  In this case, the light irradiated in a direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating another non-irradiation member different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. Part of the light can be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used as both light for displaying patterns and patterns on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and light for irradiating another irradiation object.

  In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the case has been described in which the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are arranged in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be inclined with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620.

  Specifically, the light irradiating surface of the LED 651 is disposed facing the rear side, and the light irradiating the position where the LED 651 is disposed in a direction orthogonal to the light irradiating surface of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiating the side end surface. In this case, when a pattern, a pattern, or the like is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620, the light of the LEDs 651 leaks from the inner edges of the front bases 612 and 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed facing the front side, and the light at which the LED 651 is disposed is irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. The position where the side end surface is irradiated may be set.

  Furthermore, the LED 651 is arranged so that the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 faces the rear side or the front side and is inclined with respect to the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the first and second light emitting surfaces may be irradiated to the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In addition, the light emitting surface of the LED 651 is disposed so as to be inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 toward the rear side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be irradiated to the front portion 632 of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the rear portion 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case where the amount of emitted light is increased has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right of the projection plate member 5620 may be used. It may be different from a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

  That is, the upper portion of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the area of the reflection portion 622 (for example, by dividing into three regions). The light incident from the portion is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 of the first region, the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 of the second region, and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light may be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. Accordingly, a plurality of patterns and patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be formed, and the interest of the player can be prevented from being impaired.

  In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, in the upper part). The arranged light source emits light from the upper end to irradiate the first area, the light source arranged on the left irradiates the second area from the left end face, and the light source arranged on the right is the right end Although it is possible to irradiate the third region by making light incident from the surface), it is necessary to arrange a plurality of light sources, and there is a problem that the product cost increases.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the LED 651 of the second block 654 is rotated. Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two regions, that is, a case where the second or third region is irradiated and a case where the first region is irradiated. Since it is possible, the number of LEDs 651 to be provided can be reduced accordingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft of the drive motor newly provided and rotated.

  In this case, since the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 Can be partially increased or decreased in the amount of light emitted from the front of the camera. That is, by changing the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the shading of the display of the pattern or the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

  In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 for irradiating the projection plate member 620, and the gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. Although the case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in a state in which two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

  In this case, by displaying a pattern or design on each projection plate member 620, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the combination of the display of the design or design of each projection plate member 620. As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a plurality of display patterns of patterns and designs, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

  In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected on the side surface may be reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the center of the projection plate member 3620.

  Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and portions where no pattern or pattern is displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) are partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620, and The display may be separated.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that radially overlaps with the opening 646 (see FIG. 65 (c)). A portion where light does not enter can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light enters from the radial outside of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident from the LED 651 on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 disposed on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). .

  Note that the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 provided in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are respectively displaced in different directions. It may be something.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can easily be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed in a substantially triangular shape in rear view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape in rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening and closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

  That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in a different shape when viewed from the rear surface or when the slide groove 966a2 is formed to be curved, the protrusion 945b slides on the slide groove 966a2, and the inner wall of the slide groove 966a2 and the protrusion are formed. 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b is increased, the projection 945b is easily moved by the gap, and the wing member 945 is easily rattled.

  On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 when the wing member 945 is opened and closed is formed. The gap with the projection 945b can always be made constant. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

  Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along a direction perpendicular to the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966, the length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the thickness of the sliding groove 966a2 can be reduced and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the screw screwed into the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball input member 953 and the passage member 955. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

  In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 projects from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is drawn inside the main body.

  In this case, the displacement members 11966 and 12966 are inserted into the rolling paths of the rolling game balls of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. It is possible to cut an illegal object (thread) using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). In other words, the displacement of the blades 11968c and 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed by using the electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

  In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and power is supplied (supplied) to the main body 961a. Thus, the case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing an extended spring between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying power to the main body 961a, the annular portion 961c separates from the main body 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

  In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed by using the electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed from the first member 11968 and the second member 11968, and the blade 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a larger displacement than the first member 11968. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, the displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

  In the above-described seventh embodiment, the case where the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the ball input member 953 to the passage member 955 increases.

  In this case, in order to secure a crossroad from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed using a tool such as a drill, the traveling direction of the drill is changed to the outer circumference of the annular projection 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily displaced (sliding) in the lateral direction (in the direction away from the axis of the annular projection 953c radially outward) on the surface (the outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion), and the wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected).

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is viewed from the player has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not limited thereto. A sticker on which information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed may be attached to the side.

  In this case, information including characters or graphics is displayed on the game area (front) side of the throwing path TR0, the first path TR1, and the second path TR2 of the sorting unit 980, so that the front unit 940 (the winning opening unit 930). ), The player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 using the display as a mark (reference position) even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized. In addition, the form of the information display is not limited to the attachment of the sticker, but may be printing with ink or two-color formation.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Drive Unit 600 as an Example>
A ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entrance and opening or closing the entrance, and a pair of these wing members A driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the drive means, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism comprises a driving force of the driving means. And a slide member that is slid and displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotary member. A protrusion is provided from one of the slide member and the pair of wing members, and the protrusion is provided. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that a sliding groove through which an installation portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members.

  Here, a game ball is formed to be capable of entering the ball, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball opening and opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of the pair of wing members. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010). No. 234,093). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and one end of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion that projects from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, opposed portions facing each other at predetermined intervals are formed vertically, and a protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposed portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is not stable because the gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion needs to be set large. That is, when the rotating member is rotated for the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the projecting portion, and the facing interval of the facing portion is set to the outer shape (thickness) of the projecting portion. In the case of (e), the projecting portion interferes between the opposing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing interval of the facing portion to a size that does not interfere with the projecting portion, and accordingly, the gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion increases. As a result, the wing member is likely to rattle, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes the rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. A protrusion is protruded from one of the wing members, and a slide groove through which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is a slide displacement, and the posture of the slide groove does not incline with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating like a conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width can be suppressed, for example, by setting the groove width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

  Note that the sliding groove may be a concave groove (dent) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted projecting portion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (the direction orthogonal to the groove width direction).

  In the gaming machine A1, the sliding displacement direction of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axes of the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members. They can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the slide groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to a direction of slide displacement of the slide member. A3, which is extended in a shape.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protruding portion at the time of the opening and closing operation of the wing member can always be constant. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member, the length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening due to the concave formation of the sliding groove and improve the rigidity of the sliding member.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, the slide groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member slides upward in the direction of gravity. A game machine A4, wherein the position of the protruding portion at the time of starting is set below the rotation axis of the wing member along the direction of gravity.

  Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, since the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, the sliding member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity. When the operation is performed, the inertia force increases due to the added weight of the slide member, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when the driving of the wing member in the stopped state is started and opened or closed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and Since the position of the projecting portion when the member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the projecting portion pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. The displacement component of the portion can be increased in the horizontal direction component and reduced (minimized) in the gravity direction component. Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the slide member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is opened.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction, so that the weight of the wing member is reduced. (Own weight). Therefore, also in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to start the driving of the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) and smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member is opened.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, when the slide member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the slide groove with which the protruding portion abuts includes a rotation axis of the wing member and has a gravity. A gaming machine A6, wherein an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane perpendicular to the direction is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in either of the gaming machines A4 or A5, when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the protruding portion abuts has a wing member. Since the inclined surface including the rotation axis and inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to the direction of gravity is formed, even when the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation axis of the wing member along the direction of gravity. By guiding the projecting portion along the inclined direction of the inclined surface, the sliding displacement of the sliding member upward in the direction of gravity can be smoothly started.

  In addition, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion can be reduced by that much, and the projecting portion comes into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the set portion in the direction of gravity, the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the wing member in the opened or closed stopped state. In other words, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open position or the closed position even when the wing member is affected by the vibration accompanying the flow of the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position at which the wing member is closed is recessed on an inner wall of the slide groove, The gaming machine A7, wherein the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state in which the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is regulated, so that the forcible opening of the wing member from the outside can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A8, wherein in the gaming machine A7, the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by slidingly displacing the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A7, the sliding portion is slid downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion. ) Can be used to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and an overhanging portion extending from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and a predetermined interval in the direction of the one side abutted portion and the slide displacement. And the other side abutted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is in contact with the one side contacted portion, and the overhang portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side contacted portion is When the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion is abutted, Gaming machine A9, characterized in that the engagement between the slide member is released.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member includes One-side abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one-side abutted portion and the direction of the sliding displacement. The other side abutted part against which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is disposed to face the predetermined distance. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion with the rotation, and the sliding member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing When the rotating member is rotated to the other side while the member is closed, the other-side contacted portion is moved to the other side with the rotation. Pushed by, that the slide member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, in a state in which the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is in contact with the one side contacted portion, and the overhang portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the contact portion abuts on the other side abutted portion, the engagement of the overhang portion with the slide member is released, so By rotating the member further to the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side and the wing member can be opened.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by a driving force of the driving unit, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. A protruding portion is protruded from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members. The member includes an abutting portion and an overhanging portion extending from a tip of the abutting portion, and the slide member is configured such that when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, A contacted portion on which one side of the contact portion is contacted, and the one contacted portion is disposed to face the predetermined distance in the direction of the slide displacement to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side A contact portion to which the other side of the contact portion abuts, and in a state where the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is disengaged from the slide member, and When the slide member is slid and displaced from a state in which the member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. A gaming machine A10 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion extending from the tip of the contact portion, and the sliding member includes One-side abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one-side abutted portion and the direction of the sliding displacement. The other side abutted part against which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is disposed to face the predetermined distance. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion with the rotation, and the sliding member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other contacted portion of the rotating member is Pushed by the side, that the slide member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from a state where the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation member is further rotated to the other side, so that the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form in a complicated shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may be reduced, but also the engagement may be easily released. On the other hand, as in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. It is not necessary to form the member into a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, the shape can be simplified, the strength can be ensured, and a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be hardly released.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the game machine includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and in a state where the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, A gaming machine A11 wherein a part of a slide member is disposed in a passage of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the entrance is provided, and the protruding portion is formed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the protruding portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball is inserted from the ball entrance. The falling of the played game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the game machine further includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the entrance, wherein the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. A gaming machine A12 comprising a rubbing portion that traverses the passage of the passage member when the member is slid and displaced and rubs against an edge of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the sliding member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the sliding member traverses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the sliding member has a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the vehicle, it is possible to cut a fraudulent object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

  For example, the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is made to enter from a ball entrance and passed through a passage of a passage member, and the game ball reaches a detection position of a detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (pulling out and pulling) the game ball back and forth. In response to such misconduct, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is entered in a state where the wing member is opened, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, When the rubbing part traverses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part of the passage member is When being rubbed against the edge, the yarn can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable that the rubbing part of the slide member is formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion where the rubbing portion rubs (the edge of the passage member) be formed as a blade (cutting blade).

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the game machine further includes a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball entered into the entrance, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. A gaming machine A13 comprising: a pair of cutting members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub against each other at the time of cutting.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the wing member traverses the passage of the passage member and the edge of each other. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be brought into contact with each other, it is possible to cut an unauthorized object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance port.

  For example, the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is made to enter from a ball entrance and passed through a passage of a passage member, and the game ball reaches a detection position of a detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act of causing the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by operating (pulling out and pulling) the game ball back and forth. According to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is thrown in with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members is provided. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  Note that the pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edges that are in contact with each other) may be formed from a metal material. It is preferable that portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

  In the gaming machine A12 or A13, the drive unit is configured to perform displacement of the drive shaft in a first direction by an electromagnetic force and to apply displacement of the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The wing member is formed as a solenoid actuator that is operated by the elastic recovery force of the urging means, and the displacement from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine A14.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A12 or A13, the displacement from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where it is closed is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since the driving is performed using the electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, the rotating member includes an abutting portion, and the slide member is configured to rotate when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the one-side abutted portion where one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one-side abutted portion is disposed to face the one-side abutted portion. A game device comprising: a contact portion to which the other portion of the contact portion is in contact with the other side of the contact portion, wherein the one-side contact portion and the other-side contact portion are formed substantially at the center in the width direction. Machine A15.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion, and the sliding member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the one-side abutted portion where one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one-side abutted portion is disposed to face the one-side abutted portion. The other contacted portion is provided with a contact portion on the other side, and the one contacted portion and the other contacted portion are formed substantially at the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member. Therefore, the sliding member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

  That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding or displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member and opening or closing the pair of wing members, When the position of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and also connected to the rotating member at two locations, the pair of wing members rotate It is difficult to allow the posture of the slide member to change with respect to the member, and a resistance is generated when the slide member is slid and displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is connected to the rotating member at one place. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the wing members, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member.

  The substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side abutted portion and the other-side abutted portion are formed passes through substantially the center between the pair of protruding portions in a state where the pair of wing members is opened or closed. And a position on an imaginary line along the direction of the slide displacement.

  In the gaming machine A15, a width dimension on one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less a maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion. The posture change of the slide member between the wing member and the rotation member can be easily allowed. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be twice or less the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion. This is because the above-described attitude change can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention with the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A first entrance, a first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first entrance, a first driving unit that drives the first opening / closing member, a second entrance, and a second entrance In a gaming machine having a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth and a second driving unit that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving unit and the second driving unit are provided on the second opening / closing member. A gaming machine B1 provided on the back side.

  Here, a first entrance, a first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first entrance, a first driving unit that drives the first opening / closing member, a second entrance, and a second entrance. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a second entrance and a second driving unit that drives the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, these first opening / closing member and second opening / closing member are provided. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the first driving section and the second driving section are provided on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entrance). Space can be formed. In other words, the space for disposing the first driving means and the second driving means is concentrated on the back side of the second opening / closing member, so that the space for disposing other members and devices is provided on the first opening / closing member (first receiving member). Ball opening), the space can be used effectively.

  The gaming machine B2, wherein the front projected area of the second opening / closing member is larger than the front projected area of the first opening / closing member.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the front projected area of the second opening / closing member is larger than the total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

  According to the gaming machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the front projected area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projected area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. And the total front projection area of the second driving means and the dead space on the back of the second entrance (the second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view having one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are provided on the rear side of the second ball entrance to the second opening / closing member. A gaming machine B4 which is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view having one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are provided with a second ball. Since the rear side of the mouth is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member, the dead space on the back side of the second entrance (the second opening / closing member) can be effectively used.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving unit and the second driving unit may include a main body, a driving shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a driving shaft. A driving unit housed in the unit, and a wiring that supplies power to the driving unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit, wherein the first driving unit and the second driving unit connect the driving shaft to the second shaft. A gaming machine B5, wherein the gaming machine B5 is disposed in a position facing the opening / closing member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a driving shaft provided on one side of the main body, and the driving shaft. A driving unit housed in the main unit, and a power supply to the driving unit, and a wiring drawn from the other side of the main unit. The first driving unit and the second driving unit connect the driving shaft to the (2) The wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily combined because they are arranged in a posture facing the opening / closing member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and the wiring on the outer surface of the main body are provided. A gaming machine B6, wherein the first drive means and the second drive means are disposed at positions where one outer surface except for the outer surface is substantially flush.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at positions where the outer surfaces except the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are disposed are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means Are different outputs, and the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other areas can be simplified even when the sizes of the two main bodies are different.

  That is, when the main body of the first driving unit and the main body of the second driving unit are formed in different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step, so that It is necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, which complicates the shape of the shield plate. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body portion are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can be formed into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

  Note that the shield plate separates a region where the first driving unit and the second driving unit are disposed from another region (for example, a region where the detection sensor and the control board are disposed), and interposes between the two regions. Is a conductor-made barrier for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, a first passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the first entrance and a passage for a game ball that has entered the second entrance. A second passage member to be formed, and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member, wherein the first opening / closing member rotates to a position sandwiching the ball entrance. A pair of wing members rotatably supported to open or close the entrance, wherein the first transmission mechanism is rotated by a driving force of the first driving means, and is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. A gaming machine B7 comprising: a rotating member disposed between members; and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving unit and the first transmission mechanism is rotated between the first passage member and the second passage member. , And a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members, so that it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only with the rotating member. Thus, a space can be secured on the back side of the first entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage member. Further, since it is not necessary to bend the first passage member to the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, the first entrance is brought closer to the second entrance accordingly. Can be.

  In the gaming machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the sliding member, and a second portion extends from the rotating shaft and is driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine B8 comprising: a first portion formed by bending the first portion in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and the first portion extends from the rotating shaft and is driven first. A second part driven by the means, and the first part is formed to be bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. It is possible to reduce the distance between the slide member.

  That is, the first portion is formed linearly, and the length of the first portion (the distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) is connected to the slide member from the rotation shaft in the present invention. When the distance is set to be equal to the linear distance to the part, the slide amount of the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first drive means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a linear shape and the length of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is formed. Although the distance between the driving means and the slide member can be equivalent to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed to be bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction, so that the first driving unit and the slide unit can slide while securing the slide amount of the slide member. The distance between the members can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the slide member, so that the first portion is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized, and the rotating member can be downsized. That is, the rotation member is efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the game machine further includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member, the first driving unit, A gaming machine B10, which is arranged between the game machines B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball entering the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor is in the second opening / closing state. Since it is arranged between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and the illegality is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, the first detection means is partially used. Since the driving means can be hidden, it is possible to make such fraudulent acts difficult.

  In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of such a detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be found. In the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even when the second opening / closing member is opened and the first driving means is tampered with from the second entrance, By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the place where the fraud has been applied becomes invisible. Therefore, it is possible to detect the fraud by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine B10, a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member are provided, and the detection sensor is provided in a pair, and at least a part of each of the pair of the detection sensors is provided. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the opposed sides of the pair of sensor devices, when the second opening / closing member is opened and the first driving means is improperly applied from the second entrance, the first driving means may be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such misconduct more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is easily formed between the pair of detection sensors. Is set as the fastening position of the screw member, an unshielded area on the front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to perform wrongdoing.

  The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and used for fastening and fixing the two members, or for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Preferably, the screw member is made of metal.

  In the gaming machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B11, since the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of the detection sensors, for example, the second opening / closing member is opened and the second input When a fraud is applied to the first driving means from the ball port, such fraudulent acts can be made more difficult.

  That is, the wiring is relatively easily damaged. Therefore, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, the wiring may be damaged due to the illegal act. (Disconnection). Alternatively, it is recognized that it is difficult to perform an illegal act without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and the illegal act can be easily suppressed.

  The gaming machine B13, wherein the case member has a seat to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and a fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make such fraudulent acts more difficult.

  In the gaming machine B12 or B13, the case member includes a seat to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. Gaming machine B14.

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B12 or B13, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and has a conical shape whose diameter increases as the seat portion is separated from the second opening / closing member. In order to secure a path from the second ball entrance to the first driving means, for example, when drilling is performed using a tool such as a drill, the traveling direction of the drill is changed to the seat. The wiring can be easily displaced (skid) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the wiring, thereby easily damaging (disconnecting) the wiring.

  In any of the gaming machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is drawn out to a side opposite to a fastening position of the screw member.

  According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is drawn out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the vehicle. That is, a wider area on the front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened and a fraud is applied to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make such fraudulent acts more difficult.

<About the concept of the invention in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are examples>
A game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicated with the first passage of the first member; In a gaming machine having a second member disposed on the back side of a game board, a first engagement portion engaging with the first member and a second engagement portion engaging with the second member A gaming machine C1 comprising a third member having:

  Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicated with the first passage of the first member are provided. There is known a gaming machine including a second member disposed on the back side of the game board and a second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball flowing down on the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member flows into the second passage of the second member after passing through the first passage, and the second side of the game board, Pass through two passages. Thereby, the passage route of the game ball is changed in the front-back direction, and it is possible to give the player interest.

  In this case, if a positional shift (step) occurs in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, and the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is secured. Is required to do so. However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, in addition to the first member, various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a positioning hole for positioning each of the members is provided on the game board. In the forming step, the positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed, while the positioning hole for positioning the second member is formed on the back surface of the game board by inverting the game board. Above, a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required, which is not practical.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the third member having the first engaging portion engaging with the first member and the second engaging portion engaging with the second member is provided, the third member is provided. By utilizing the above, the second member can be positioned with respect to the first member.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming board includes an opening formed with an opening, and a connection portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in an internal space. The gaming machine C2, wherein the third member is disposed in an internal space of the unit.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is provided in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as an arrangement space for the third member, the number of processing steps is reduced by that amount, and the product cost is reduced. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member is configured such that the first engagement portion engages with the first passage of the first member, and the second engagement portion engages with the second passage of the second member. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member has a first engagement portion in the first passage of the first member, and a second engagement portion in the second passage of the second member. Since the engagement is performed, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be performed effectively. In other words, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional shift (step) at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (the second portion) Since the connection portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of a displacement (step) is more effective than when the other portions are positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game balls can flow down smoothly.

  In the gaming machine C3, a part of an inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C3, since a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are provided. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be easily tolerated.

  The gaming machine C5, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member. When attaching the members, it is not necessary to separately attach the third member. By attaching the first member, the attachment of the third member can be performed at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After the first member and the third member are attached to the game board, there is no need to separately perform an operation of engaging the first engagement portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C6, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, a second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be able to engage with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C6, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is connected to the second member from the side opposite to the first member. The first member and the third member are attached to the game board at the same time, and then the second member is attached to the back of the game board. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member provided with the first passage, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. A gaming machine C8 in which the members are fixedly or integrally formed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member provided with the first passage and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixedly or integrally formed on the fixing member, the first member can be held (disposed) by the first member at the same time as the operation of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. . Thereby, when attaching a 1st member and a 2nd member to a game board, forgetting to attach a 3rd member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first member is formed so as to be capable of entering a game ball, and is rotated to a position between the entrance and the entrance which is communicated with the first passage. A pair of wing members which are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a driving force of the driving means for the pair of wings A transmission mechanism for transmitting the pair of wing members, the rotation mechanism being rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the sliding member being slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotation member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine C9, wherein the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and a pair of members that are slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. And a slide member that opens and closes the wing member. Therefore, compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member, it is on the back side of the entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage. Space. In this case, since the third member can guide the slide displacement of the slide member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C9, the pair of wing members includes a projecting portion projecting toward the sliding member, and the sliding member includes a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine C10, wherein the third member has a covering surface portion facing an opening of the sliding groove of the sliding member opposite to the wing member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C9, a pair of wing members is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted. Since the slide member has a moving groove, and the third member has a covering surface portion facing the opening on the side opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member, the sliding member slides by the covering member of the third member. The opening of the groove is shielded from the outside, so that dust and foreign matter can be prevented from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of wing members.

<About the concept of the invention, taking the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow game balls to enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which the game balls entered into the ball entrance are rolled, and rolling thereof A gaming machine having a path member into which a game ball rolling on a surface flows, wherein a plurality of the path members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

  Here, there are provided a ball entrance formed so that game balls can enter, an opening / closing member for opening / closing the entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the entrance. A gaming machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-3092). The entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls entered in the entrance are gathered in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member Are flowed one ball at a time. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the entrance to the passage member is correspondingly increased. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is thrown in from the entrance by the time the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are provided at predetermined intervals, even if the entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game balls to the passage member (the rolling surface) Length) can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to reach the passage member, and to quickly flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The gaming machine D1, further comprising a detection sensor for detecting a game ball having entered the entrance, and the detection sensor is provided at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball entering the entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is provided at a connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, a game ball that has entered the entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, another game ball can be prevented from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and over-winning can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be in contact with a game ball rolling from the entrance to the passage member and rolling on the rolling surface. The ball entrance is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide means is provided at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine D3 disposed between the game machine D3 and the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to contact the gaming ball that inclines from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entrance is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape and the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide is provided in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arranged between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the entrance, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member so that it is hard to stay at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball from the entrance can be quickly flown into the passage member, and as a result, another ball is prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. As a result, over-winning can be suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, wherein the gaming machine D4 is provided with a guide groove which is formed in the rolling surface and formed as a concave groove which is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. .

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 includes a guide groove which is formed in the rolling surface and formed as a concave groove which is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Therefore, it is possible to receive a game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide the ball to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball from the entrance can be quickly flown into the passage member, and as a result, another ball is prevented from entering before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member. As a result, over-winning can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine D5, wherein the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to a longitudinal direction of the rolling surface in the gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is extended in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The game balls rolling in the direction can be easily received in the guide grooves, and the received game balls can be quickly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4 or D5, since the width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in a state of being aligned. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly made to flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region where the first guide unit is provided, across the passage member in a longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine D7, wherein the second area is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first area.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is provided with a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first area where the first guide means is provided. The second area on the opposite side with respect to the first area is formed to be inclined downward toward the first area, so that a game ball that has entered the second area or a game ball that has rolled from the first area to the second area Can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the descending inclination of the second region. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  The gaming machine D7, further comprising second guide means protruding from the second area of the rolling surface.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D7, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second area because the second guiding means protruding from the second area of the rolling surface is provided. The game ball can be decelerated before the passage member. That is, while the rolling speed is increased up to the passage member, the speed is reduced just before (immediately before) the passage member, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier by that much. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the gaming machine D7 or D8, a game which is disposed in the second area of the rolling surface and is rolled in the second area of the rolling surface along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine D9 comprising second guide means formed so as to be able to guide a ball toward the entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the gaming machine D9 is disposed in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is moved toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the game device is provided with the second guide means formed so as to be able to guide the game ball rolled along to the entrance opening side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is provided in front of the passage member. Can be slowed down. That is, while the rolling speed is increased up to the passage member, the speed is reduced just before (immediately before) the passage member, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier by that much. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the gaming machine D9, the opening / closing member is disposed at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can contact with the opening when the entrance of the ball is opened.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D9, when the entrance is opened, the opening / closing member is provided at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can contact. The game ball guided to the entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member earlier by that much. As a result, it is possible to suppress another game ball from entering before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the gaming machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the entrance as the side edge opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means, A gaming machine D11 wherein an upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward a side portion opposite to the first guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D9 or D10, the second guide means separates from the entrance as the side edge opposite to the first guide means separates from the first guide means. And the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball can quickly flow into the passage member while preventing the game ball from jumping out of the entrance. Can be done.

  That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region directed toward the passage member, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed from the entrance of the ball. Since it is unlikely to jump out, it is possible to contact the side edge of the second guide means and guide it toward the entrance, so that the rolling from the second area to the first area through the passage member can be prevented. It is possible to suppress the flow and to flow into the passage member earlier. On the other hand, a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the upper surface of the second guide means to the first area (first guide means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by the overcoming of the second guide means and the collision with the first guide member, and the deceleration can be surely performed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing jumping out of the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being entered before the entrance opening is closed by the opening / closing member, thereby suppressing over-winning.

  In the gaming machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge portion facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extending in a longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. A dimension of a side edge of the first guide means in a direction orthogonal to the first guide means is larger than a dimension of a side edge of the second guide means in a direction orthogonal to a longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Gaming machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means is made larger, the game ball that has climbed over the upper surface of the second guide means is brought into contact with (collides with) the first guide means, and can be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly.

  In the gaming machine D11 or D12, a position separated from the rolling surface by a radius of the gaming ball is included in a side edge of the second guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D11 or D12, the position separated from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge of the second guide means, so that the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has surpassed is brought into contact with (collides with) the side edge of the first guide means, whereby the speed can be surely decelerated, and the ball can be easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly.

  The gaming machine D14, wherein in any of the gaming machines D8 to D13, the second guide means is located on an extension of the first guide means in the inclined direction on the first inclined surface.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D8 to D13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the first guiding means in the inclined direction on the first inclined surface, so that the first guiding means is provided. Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact with (collides with) the second guide means. In addition to being able to decelerate, it can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly.

  In the gaming machine D14, the game machine D14 includes a guide groove which is formed in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove which is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. A gaming machine D15, wherein a height dimension to an uppermost portion is made larger than a radius of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D14, the gaming machine D15 further includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is provided on the rolling surface and that is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member, and a bottom surface of the guide groove. Since the height from the to the uppermost part of the second guide means is larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is reduced. When the game ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily contact (collide) with the second guide means. Accordingly, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member, and can quickly flow into the passage member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the game machine includes a guide groove formed in the rolling surface and formed as a concave groove inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member, and a width of the guide groove is reduced. A gaming machine D16, which is reduced in size toward the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D15, the gaming machine D16 includes a guide groove which is formed in a rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove which is inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball which rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member quickly.

<About the concept of the invention in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are examples>
In a gaming machine having a ball entry unit provided with a ball entrance formed to allow game balls to enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is disposed, The game board has an opening formed in the thickness direction thereof, and the ball entry unit includes the ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is disposed on a front side of the game board. A first unit provided, and a second unit having a second passage disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and connected to the first passage. A gaming machine E1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, a game provided with a ball entry unit provided with a ball entrance formed to allow game balls to enter and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board provided with the ball entry unit A machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-13046). According to such a gaming machine, the specifications of the gaming machine can be changed while the game board is diverted (shared) by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages). it can. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is disposed on the front of the game board, for example, it is necessary to previously secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages on the front of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that a space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the ball entry unit has a ball entrance and a first passage connected to the ball entrance, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. Since one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and arranged on the back side of the first unit via the opening of the game board are provided on the front side of the game board. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) on the front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting (combining) the game board, The space in front of the can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine E1, at least a part of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit. A gaming machine E2 which is disposed at an overlapping position.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit. Since the second unit is disposed at a position overlapping with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, in order to make the second unit visible to a player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board may be formed from a plywood or a sticker may be attached to the game board. Since it is permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  The gaming machine E3, wherein at least a front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, at least the front side in the second passage of the second unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the second unit flows down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit. The game ball to play can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The first unit may be entirely formed of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit overlapping the second passage in a front view is formed of the light-transmitting material. This is because the downflow of the game ball can be visually recognized, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine E4, wherein the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material. When the player visually recognizes the second unit, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction and flows down, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed on the front of the second passage of the second unit.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed on the front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (front-back position) can be easily recognized by the player using the display as a mark (reference position). In addition, as a display mode, printing with ink, sticking of a seal, two-color molding, and the like are exemplified.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second passage is a second upstream passage connected to the first passage, and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage into a plurality of branches. And a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, wherein the second unit is disposed on a back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. And a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed and which is disposed in the second upstream unit, A game machine E6, wherein a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in the plurality of second branch passages.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and has a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages. A second upstream unit, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and formed with a plurality of second connection passages, and detects the passage of a game ball through the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensor is provided, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having a small number of the second branch passages to manufacture a gaming machine having a different specification, the number of the detection sensors is reduced. Workers can be prevented from making mistakes.

  That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connection passage, the detection sensors can be arranged by the number of the second connection passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is In the case where the first passage and the second connection passage are changed to another unit that connects only one passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor, but only by the number of the second connection passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor is provided. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are provided in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a worker from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

  In the gaming machine E6, the first unit includes a second entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entrance passes: A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A gaming machine E7, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E6, the first unit has a second entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and the first unit is inserted into the second entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed on a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are provided, the detection sensors provided in the second unit can be dispersed, and accordingly, the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is performed by the combination.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit is connected. Is directly or indirectly engaged, thereby positioning the second unit with respect to the first unit. Therefore, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position at which the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position at which the third passages are connected are the same. Or by directly or indirectly engaging the third passages with each other for positioning, it is possible to perform positioning with respect to the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

  Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is intended to suppress the occurrence of displacement (step) in a connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or a connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connection portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connection portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the position shift ( The occurrence of a step can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game balls can smoothly flow down.

  In any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding portion is protruded. A gaming machine E9, wherein a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage projects toward the second downstream unit. And a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the detection sensor and the receiving portion engage to position the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit. It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole while suppressing part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside while allowing the detection to be performed.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first unit has a second entrance formed to allow game balls to enter, and a third passage through which game balls entered into the second entrance pass. Is formed at least between the second branch passages in the second unit.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entrance is passed is at least between the second branch passage in the second unit. Therefore, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the second passage has a bent portion bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and an inner surface of a bent outer wall portion at the bent portion. A gaming machine E11 characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the base and the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as going toward the downflow direction of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the bent portion is formed. The standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion at the portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as going toward the flowing direction of the game ball, This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, the upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the outer wall portion of the bent portion, thereby increasing the rigidity of the passage and improving the durability, and playing the game ball along the upright end of the erected portion. While it is possible to guide and smoothly flow down the bent portion, since the standing portion is located in front of the game ball in front view, the game ball is hidden in the standing portion and the visibility of the game ball Decrease. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downflow direction of the game ball, so that rigidity can be ensured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the set portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, visibility of the game ball can be secured.

<About the concept of the invention in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are examples>
In a gaming machine having a first passage member through which a game ball passes, and a second passage member having an upstream end connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that at least a bottom surface upstream end on the bottom side and a side surface upstream end on the side surface of the upstream end of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

  Here, a game having a first passage member through which a game ball passes, and a second passage member having an upstream end connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and through which a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in such a structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, displacement between the two cannot be avoided. Therefore, the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member are not connected. There is a problem that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the game ball, and there is a risk that smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, at least the bottom upstream end on the bottom side and the side upstream end on the side surface of the upstream end of the second passage member are formed so as to have different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side (upstream end on the bottom side) and the timing on the step on the side side (upstream end on the side) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side, and to disperse those effects, so that the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  In the gaming machine F1, a position separated by a radius of a game ball from the bottom upstream end is included in the side upstream end.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, a position separated by a radius of the gaming ball from the bottom upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end, so that the gaming ball is transferred from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the side surface upstream end. In other words, the position of the step on the bottom surface and the position of the step on the side surface, which are affected by the game ball, can be reliably made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface, and to easily disperse those influences. ).

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, among the downstream ends of the first passage member, a bottom surface downstream end on a bottom surface side and a side surface downstream end on a side surface side are formed so as to have different positions in a passing direction of a game ball, and the first The passage member includes a protruding piece projecting from a downstream end thereof toward an upstream end of the second passage member, and having a protruding tip serving as the side surface downstream end, and the second passage member has an upstream end thereof. A gaming machine F3 provided with a recessed portion which is recessed in the side wall and receives the protruding piece and a portion facing the protruding tip end of the protruding piece is the side wall upstream end.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first passage member is projected from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and its protruding tip is connected to the side surface downstream end. The second passage member has a recess formed at the upstream end thereof for receiving the projection piece and having a portion facing the protruding tip of the projection piece as the side wall upstream end. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a position different from the bottom surface upstream end on the downstream side in the passage direction of the game ball, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. In the meantime, the game ball can be guided by the projecting piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly.

  On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively low rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the gaming machine F3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball). Even when the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the second passage member are located at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball is positioned on the bottom side (the bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (the upstream end on the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side, and to disperse those effects, so that the game balls can flow down (pass) smoothly. it can.

  Further, according to the gaming machine F3, since the gaming machine projecting piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side face of the recess is brought into contact with the projecting piece, so that the first piece is brought into contact with the first piece. The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be regulated. In other words, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to jump up when climbing, and therefore the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member) Also, as compared to the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a lower position, it is easier to hinder smooth flow (passing) of the game ball. Therefore, as in the gaming machine F3, the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member can be restricted because the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. The formation of a step can be suppressed, and this is particularly effective for smoothly flowing down a game ball.

  In the gaming machine F3, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. As compared with the case where the game ball is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the slope and hardly rebounded. As a result, it is possible to easily pass (flow down) the game ball.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second passage member The side upstream end of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, as compared with the case where the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the game ball colliding with the side surface upper end surface of the second passage member slides along the slope. To make it harder to bounce. As a result, it is possible to easily pass (flow down) the game ball.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, for example, compared to a case where the second passage member is formed in a shape (a step-like shape) having a projecting piece or a concave portion. Thus, the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (hollow portion) of the injection molding die can be made gentle, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling are suppressed, and the molding is performed. Performance can be improved.

  In the gaming machines F4 and F5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that has collided with the upstream end can be pressed against the bottom side. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping up and bouncing at the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to easily pass (flow down) the game ball.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entrance and opening or closing the entrance, and a pair of these wing members In a gaming machine having a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the fins, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are opened from the outside in an opening direction. The gaming machine G1, wherein the transmission mechanism is formed so that the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction can be restricted when the pair of wing members are displaced.

  Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged with the ball entrance in between, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the pair. A driving means for causing a pair of wings to be disposed at an allowable position for allowing a game ball to enter a ball entrance when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, and a pair of wings being driven by the driving force of the driving means. There has been known a gaming machine including a regulating means disposed at a regulating position for regulating the entry of a game ball into a ball entrance when a member is closed (for example, JP-A-2011-172833).

  According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving unit, the regulating unit is disposed at the allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can enter the entrance. You can get into the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving unit, the regulating unit is disposed at the regulating position. Therefore, when the pair of wing members is forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball is moved to the entrance. It is possible to regulate entry.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, after the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of restricting illegal entry of a game ball into the entrance is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed so that the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction can be regulated. It can suppress that a wing member is forcibly opened. Therefore, it can be easily controlled that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings is provided. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. The inner wall has a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. The gaming machine G2, wherein the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state in which the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is regulated, so that the forcible opening of the wing member from the outside can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine G3, wherein in the gaming machine G2, a direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to a rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G2, since the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, the wing member is displaced from the outside to the opening direction. Thus, even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, the forcible opening of the wing member can be suppressed.

  Further, the slide member can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G2 or G3, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion by slidingly displacing the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the slide member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member is reduced. By utilizing (own weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state where the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings is provided. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is A contact portion, and a projecting portion that protrudes from the tip of the contact portion, wherein the slide member is configured such that when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, One side abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one side abutted portion is disposed opposite to the one side abutted portion at a predetermined interval in a direction of the slide displacement and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the contact And a second contacted portion to which the other side of the portion is contacted, and in a state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one contacted portion and the tension is applied. The projecting portion is engaged with the slide member, and when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position at which the other side of the contact portion abuts on the other-side abutted portion, the overhang is generated. The gaming machine G5, wherein the engagement of the portion with the slide member is released.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G1, the rotating member includes the contact portion and the overhanging portion extending from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutted portion is abutted against one side of the abutting portion, and a predetermined distance in the direction of the sliding displacement from the one abutted portion. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member to be opposed to the other side, the other side of the contact portion is in contact with the other side contacted portion, so that the rotating member is on one side When rotated, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, with the rotation, the other side contacted portion is pressed by the other side of the contact portion, By ride member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, in a state in which the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is in contact with the one side contacted portion, and the overhang portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the contact portion abuts on the other side abutted portion, the engagement of the overhang portion with the slide member is released, so By rotating the member further to the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side and the wing member can be opened.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the sliding member or the pair of wings is provided. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is A contact portion, and a projecting portion that protrudes from the tip of the contact portion, wherein the slide member is configured such that when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, One side abutted portion to which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one side abutted portion is disposed opposite to the one side abutted portion at a predetermined interval in a direction of the slide displacement and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the contact And the other side abutted portion to which the other side of the portion is abutted, and in a state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, and the wing member is closed. When the slide member is slid and displaced from a state in which the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhang portion is engaged with the slide member. A gaming machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the rotating member includes the contact portion and the projecting portion that projects from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutted portion is abutted against one side of the abutting portion, and a predetermined distance in the direction of the sliding displacement from the one abutted portion. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member to be opposed to the other side, the other side of the contact portion is in contact with the other side contacted portion, so that the rotating member is on one side When rotated, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, with the rotation, the other side contacted portion is pressed by the other side of the contact portion, By ride member is slid displaced toward the other side, the blade members are open.

  In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from a state where the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation member is further rotated to the other side, so that the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form in a complicated shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may be reduced, but also the engagement may be easily released. On the other hand, as in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. It is not necessary to form the member into a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, the shape can be simplified, the strength can be ensured, and a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be hardly released.

  In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the game machine further includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and in a state where the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, The gaming machine G7, wherein a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6, the game machine G7 includes a passage member that forms a passage of the game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the protruding portion is formed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is disposed in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the protruding portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball is inserted from the ball entrance. The falling of the played game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention with the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entrance and opening or closing the entrance, and a pair of these wing members A game ball having a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the ball, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, wherein A game machine H1 comprising a passage member that forms a passage of the transmission member, wherein a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

  Here, a game ball is formed to be capable of entering the ball, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball opening and opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of the pair of wing members. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010). No. 234,093). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

  In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is made to enter from the entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that the detection sensor detects a plurality of times by operating (pulling out and pulling) the other end of the game ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress an illegal act of causing a detection sensor to detect a plurality of times by bonding a tip of a thread to a game ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is bonded to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the part. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act that the detection sensor detects a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine H1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the transmission member causes the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member, and the slide member rubs against an edge of the passage member. A gaming machine H2 comprising a friction portion.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, the transmission mechanism is configured such that when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member is Since the rubbing portion is provided to rub against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegally inserted illegally into the passage from the entrance.

  That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered in a state where the wing member is opened, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The intermediate portion of the thread, the tip of which is bonded to the game ball, is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is preferable that the rubbing part of the slide member is formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion where the rubbing portion rubs (the edge of the passage member) be formed as a blade (cutting blade).

  In the gaming machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, a pair of wing members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. Since the transmission member is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegally inserted illegally into the passage from the entrance.

  That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member opened, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is bonded to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned misconduct can be suppressed.

  Note that the pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edges that are in contact with each other) may be formed from a metal material. It is preferable that portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the driving unit is configured such that the driving shaft is displaced in a first direction by an electromagnetic force, and that the driving shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The wing member is formed as a solenoid actuator that is operated by the elastic recovery force of the urging means, and the displacement from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or H3, the displacement from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since the driving is performed using the electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention in which the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 is an example>
A light-transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light-transmitting member, is incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. A gaming machine I1 comprising: an emission increasing unit that emits light; and the emission increasing unit is disposed outside a display area.

  Here, a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmitting member, are provided. There is known a gaming machine in which incident light is reflected by a reflection portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, JP-A-2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by arranging the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, in a normal state, the display of the liquid crystal display device via the light transmitting member is performed by the player. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiating means is made incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, the light is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting section is provided with a plurality of groups each including a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group has a pattern or design. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a design. That is, together with the display of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to make a pattern or design stand out (display) on the front of the liquid crystal display device.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem in that light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it is difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiating means not only increases the cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, which causes a problem that other members and devices are affected by heat.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the output increasing means for increasing the proportion of the light emitted from the light irradiating means, which is emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, is provided. Light emitted from the front of the transmission member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make patterns and patterns clearly appear (display). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiating means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the emission increasing means, and accordingly, the appearance can be suppressed from being deteriorated.

  In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of the light transmission member may be, for example, on the back surface of the light transmission member or inside the light transmission member.

  In the gaming machine I1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of a front surface or a rear surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I2, since the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitting member emits light from the light irradiating means, and Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and accordingly, the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be reduced. Light collection efficiency can be increased. Therefore, of the light emitted from the light irradiating means, it is possible to increase the light that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is increased. In addition, patterns and designs can be clearly displayed (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiating means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that when another device in the game area emits light. Thus, the light from the other device can be blocked by the outer edge member and can be suppressed from being incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating unit is turned off (when light does not enter the light transmitting member and a pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. Thus, it is possible to suppress the display of a pattern or a pattern on the front of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine I2, the outer edge member is provided on each of a front surface and a rear surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I2, the outer edge members are disposed on the front and back of the light transmitting member, respectively. Light that is not directly incident on the side end face and deviates to the front side and rear side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

  Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member in this manner, even when light emitted by another device in the game area reaches from either the front or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, it is possible to prevent light from being incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating unit is turned off (when light does not enter the light transmitting member and a pattern or pattern is not displayed on the front of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. Thus, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of a pattern or a pattern on the front of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is disposed so as to protrude outward beyond a side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is disposed so as to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. The light can be easily reflected on the protruding portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) to be incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased.

  The gaming machine I5 according to any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, wherein the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in the effect provided by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, the outer edge member is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is sharpened. Can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of the same refractive index material, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member returns to the light transmitting member after being totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (boundary with air), but returns to the light transmitting member from the outer edge member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light reaching the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, as in the gaming machine I4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be transmitted to the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. The light can easily be reflected at the boundary with (or can be totally reflected), so that light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  The gaming machine I6 according to any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between a front surface and a rear surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in the effect provided by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected at the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is sharpened. Can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member is the same or the difference in the refractive index is relatively small, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is hardly reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member returns to the light transmitting member after being totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (boundary with air), but returns to the light transmitting member from the outer edge member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light reaching the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, by arranging the outer edge member such that a predetermined gap is formed between the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, as in the gaming machine I5, light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. The reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, so that light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the game machine further includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, wherein the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along a circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives the pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A gaming machine I7 comprising a driving unit.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and extends along the circumferential direction of the annular outer or inner circumferential surface. The curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotating mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and a driving means for rotating and driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for a player to visually recognize a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member has a function of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and a function of transmitting the rotation driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member and rotating the light transmitting member. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability accompanying the simplification of the structure.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I7, the gaming machine further includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, wherein the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A gaming machine I8, characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along a circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide grooves, the action of the guide grooves and the support wheels exposes the side end surface of the light transmitting member, The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can enter from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, it is possible for a player to visually recognize a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the role of condensing the light irradiated from the light irradiation means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support wheel can be shared by the outer edge member. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the number of parts, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

  The support wheel may be rotatably supported or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a form in which the rotatably supported support wheel rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, and An example is shown in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove.

  Further, in the gaming machine I8 subordinate to the gaming machine I7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is provided on one of the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is recessed is provided on the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose them on the other of the front and the back. That is, since the outer edge member is disposed on the front and back of the light transmitting member, of the light emitted from the light irradiating unit, the light is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, This is because each of the out-going light and the out-going light can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and can be incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface and the rear surface of the light transmitting member, light emitted by another device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member. This is because even in this case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, and the light can be prevented from being incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed so that the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine I9 characterized by being a groove.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I8, the outer edge member is formed so that the outer peripheral side thereof is opposed to the front or back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member are formed. Since the guide groove is formed between the opposing members, the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be reduced in size. In other words, by making one inner wall of the guide groove bear on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Accordingly, the size of the above-described structure can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the outer edge member is provided in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the outer edge member and the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is sharpened. Can be raised (displayed).

  In any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, a side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to a front surface and a back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating unit is configured to irradiate light from the irradiating surface with a light irradiating direction. A gaming machine I10, wherein the irradiation surface is disposed to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, Since the irradiation surface is disposed so that the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the irradiation surface is opposed to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated by the light irradiation means. Can be easily reflected on the front or back of the light transmitting member. As a result, light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is sharpened. Can be raised (displayed).

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 is an example>
In a gaming machine, comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting units dispersedly arranged around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the target member. One or more substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted and which are elastically deformable, and a base member for holding the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Gaming machine J1 characterized by the following.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting units each arranged with the irradiation surface facing the target member (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 29735). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting unit and making the light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting unit. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member into a disc shape from a light-transmitting material and forms a reflecting portion, and simultaneously applies a plurality of light emitting means to the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member). , And a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting unit is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member is provided (unknown at the time of filing the application).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it has been newly found that a plurality of light emitting means need to be arranged around the target member, respectively, so that the work of arranging the light emitting means is increased. In particular, since the plurality of light-emitting units need to be disposed with their respective irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each of the light-emitting units has a different orientation), the labor of the arrangement work also increases from this point. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, at least two or more light emitting units are mounted and one or more substrate members formed to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Since the base member is provided, the work of disposing at least two or more light emitting means can be completed by disposing one substrate member on the base member. Therefore, the labor of arranging the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, when the substrate member is provided on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined posture in which the substrate member is elastically deformed, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, it is not necessary to dispose the plurality of light emitting means in such a manner that their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, so that the work of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed from this point as well.

  The gaming machine J2, further comprising a block formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member and disposed on the substrate member, wherein the block is held by the base member.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the rigidity is formed higher than the substrate member and the block member is provided on the substrate member, and the block member is held by the base member. In addition, it is possible to suppress the warpage and the bending of the substrate member and to easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the warp or the bending of the substrate member on the posture of the light emitting means, to direct the irradiation surface of the light emitting means in an appropriate direction, and to easily maintain the orientation.

  In the gaming machine J2, the light emitting means is provided in an area of the substrate member where the block body is provided.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J2, the light emitting means is provided in the region of the board member where the block body is provided, so that the posture of the light emitting means is such that the warpage of the board member is caused. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be more easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the block members are disposed on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the base member is in an attitude in which the substrate member positioned between the block members is elastically deformed. A gaming machine J4 held by the body.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block members are disposed on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the board members positioned between the block members are elastically arranged. Since the base member is held in the deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held on the base member. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the light-emitting unit is disposed on a front surface of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is provided on the opposite side of the target member from the substrate member. A gaming machine J5 arranged on the back.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is located on the opposite side of the target member. The light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

  In the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front of the board member.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front of the board member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the light emitting means and being damaged.

  In the gaming machine J6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is provided between the heads of the two screws.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

  Preferably, the two screws are provided along the direction of displacement of the movable member. By arranging the light emitting means between the heads of the screws thus arranged, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the head of the screw, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

  In any of the gaming machines J2 to J7, one of the base body and the block body has a projection protruding therefrom, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the projection is formed on the other of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine J8, which is recessed in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines J2 to J7, a projection is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and the projection is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, the block body can be provided on the base body by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, and the labor of the installation work can be suppressed. . In particular, when a plurality of blocks are disposed on a substrate member and disposed between the blocks in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one of the blocks is positioned by fitting (temporarily fixing). ), The board member can be elastically deformed (bent), and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the disposing work can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body has a recess on a surface provided on the board member, and the electronic component provided on the board member is housed in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine J9 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in any of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body has the concave portion on the surface provided on the substrate member, and is provided on the substrate member in the concave portion of the block body. Since the electronic components are housed, the electronic components can be covered and protected by the block body. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being brought into contact with the electronic component and damaged.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game comprising: a base member; a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position; and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. An elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, wherein the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. Disposed in the base member in a form displaced in the direction, in a state where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, The gaming machine K1 wherein gravity acting on the displacement member and elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

  Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine provided with an effect provided by a displacement of a displacement member is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retreat position (for example, one of the first position and the second position) that is invisible to the player or located on the outer edge side of the game area, and a predetermined game is performed. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhang position (the other of the first position or the second position) that protrudes into the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhang position is performed in the game. The effect which makes a person visually recognize is performed. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so that it is difficult to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the elastic member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. It is disposed on the base member in a form displaced in the direction toward the two positions, and in a state where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the reciprocating displacement (approximately a single vibration) caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member is centered on this balanced position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be an orthographic motion of a constant-velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can perform an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of an orthogonal projection of constant velocity circular motion). And the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, by simply switching whether or not to apply a driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, variations in displacement can be increased, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control. Improvement can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine K1, the displacement member is formed so that one end is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Gaming machine K2.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, one end is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. In the case where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released and the displacement member performs reciprocal displacement (approximately a single vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a displacement obtained by combining not only a vertical linear motion but also a rotational motion about one end as a center of rotation. As a result, an interesting displacement can be performed by such a displacement member.

  In the gaming machine K2, there is provided a transmission unit for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving unit. A gaming machine K3, comprising: a connecting member rotatably connected at one end to a position eccentric from the center of rotation of the rotating member and rotatably connected at the other end to the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K2, the transmitting means is rotatably disposed on the base member and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. And a connecting member having one end connected to the displaced member and the other end connected to the displaceable member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displaceable member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are released. When a reciprocating displacement (approximately a simple vibration) caused by a force is performed by a displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls a connecting member to rotate a rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member among the forces in the push-pull direction. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, a change can be given to the displacement speed of the reciprocal displacement of the displacement member, Interesting displacement can be performed by such a displacement member.

  In the gaming machine K3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a direction connecting the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member is determined. A game machine K4, wherein a direction connecting a connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and a connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the connecting position of the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the rotating member and the connecting member, The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balancing position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in any of the pushing and pulling directions from the balancing position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balance position, so that the reciprocation displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacing member is displaced in the center side range including: the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is higher than the center side range. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion is opposed to the other one of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to abut.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member includes a protruding portion projecting toward the other, and is provided between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the center range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the first position is larger than the center range. When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. In the case where the displacement member performs reciprocating displacement about the balance position (predetermined position), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion and smoothly reciprocate the displacement member in the central area. The driving force of the driving means When displacing the displacement member more, in the outer range, the projecting portion is opposed to the other one of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to abut, and it is possible to suppress the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member. .

  In the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the displacement member is set in the range, in a state where the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member is reduced by suppressing the backlash between the rotating member and the connecting member by using the projecting portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, resistance can be prevented from being generated due to the sliding of the projecting portion, so that the displacement member acts on the displacement member. The displacement of the displacement member can be smoothly performed while utilizing gravity.

  For example, when the first position is a retreat position where the displacement member retreats to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is a projecting position where the displacement member projects toward the center of the game area. In the first position (the retracted position), the rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and it is possible to prevent the effect of other members from being hindered, and to suppress the displacement member. Is displaced from the first position to the second position (projection position), the component can be quickly extended (displaced) to the second position, and the effect of the extension operation can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotation member, the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are located substantially on a straight line. Gaming machine K7.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacing member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member tries to rotate the rotating member by pushing and pulling the connecting member, the pushing and pulling direction becomes the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is A state that does not occur (that is, a dead center) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, it is possible to smoothly (quickly) displace the displacement member while avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion. After being disposed at the position, the above-described operation of the dead center can suppress rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and the durability.

  In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is connected to the connection position between the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member and opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Gaming machine K8.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes a displacement member and a base. Since it is located on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, When the displacement member rattles against the base member, the contact portion of the connection member abuts on the base member, so that the rotation member and the connection portion of the connection member (the rotation member and one end of the connection member are rotatable. The inclination of the rotation shaft with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the shaft can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive unit includes a first drive unit, And a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the first driving unit, and a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the second driving unit. The gaming machine L1, wherein the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacing member is placed at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, and when a predetermined game state is formed, the projecting member extends to the game area. An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the extended position is visually recognized by the player.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the effect of the effect by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, since the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, the effect by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to perform a surprising effect of the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is varied depending on the driving force, only the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased or decreased, and the displacement mode (trajectory) is still constant. It was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the driving unit includes the first driving unit and the second driving unit, and the driving member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving unit. (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner between the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the drive means, the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike a conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, the effect is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the player can be displaced in the different displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement modes.

  In the gaming machine L1, a first member slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first driving unit, and a second member slidably disposed on the base member and slidably displaced on the base member. Wherein the first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine L1, the first member is provided so as to be slidable and displaceable on the base member, and is provided so as to be slidable and displaceable on the base member. And a second member driven by the second driving means, and the first and second parts of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively. When the first member is slid and displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacing member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second driving means makes the second member slidable. When the member is slid and displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two types of displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine L2, two kinds of displacement modes are formed not by the same rotation center and different rotation directions but by different rotation directions and different rotation centers. Therefore, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform a surprise effect of the player.

  In the gaming machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from a first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is provided. A gaming machine L3 which is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine L2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion and the first member of the displacement member is provided. The connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, so that the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving member or the driving force of the second driving member. A displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed according to whether the second member is linearly displaced. it can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two types of displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement modes.

  In this case, since the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved trajectory. In this case, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member displaced in a curved shape. Occurs), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used, and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and to improve durability and operation reliability.

  In the gaming machine L3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the driving units is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, a displacement in which both the first driving unit and the second driving unit are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three types of displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform a stunning effect of the player by switching the displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine L4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the type of displacement itself is different in addition to the one in which the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are different. (I.e., rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and the effect of surprise of the player can be more easily performed.

  In the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving unit and the second driving unit, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine L5 characterized by a speed.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is different from the displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include a rotational motion and a linear motion. That is, not only can the displacement member be displaced (linearly moved) in parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also can be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a stunning effect of the player.

  It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode in which the rotational motion and the linear motion are combined with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member slides along the slide groove by the driving force of the one driving means. It has become possible for the first time to use two driving means as in the present invention.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L5, a second displacement member is provided so as to be displaceable on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means, the displacement is While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second drive means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. Gaming machine L6.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming machine L6 further includes a second displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. The device (change) between the mode of displacement by the first driving means and the mode of displacement by the second driving means can be increased. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<About the concept of the invention using the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and light irradiation means for irradiating light to the target member, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable. The gaming machine M1 wherein an irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiating means is changed by the one or both of the displacements.

  Here, a game is provided that includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. A machine is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this gaming machine, a light irradiating means (LED) is provided inside the displacement member, and a light transmitting portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from behind with the light irradiating means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize a mode in which a part (light transmitting portion) of the displacement member emits light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation unit is constant, there is a problem that the change in the mode visually recognized by the player is small, and it is difficult to give interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating unit are formed so as to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiating unit is changed by the displacement of one or both. The mode visually recognized by the player can be changed. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interesting.

  Examples of the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed include a mode in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation unit is changed, and a change in the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation unit to the irradiation position of the target member. And combinations of these forms.

  The gaming machine M2, further comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

  In the gaming machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is provided with light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and is provided with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. A gaming machine M3 characterized by the following.

  Here, the reflection unit is provided with a plurality of groups each including a plurality of reflection surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a design.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and provided on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, the player can visually recognize different portions of the target member from the opening of the shielding member.

  For example, a first position among a plurality of groups constituting the reflection unit can be visually recognized through the opening, and a second group which is a different group from the first group has an opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position that can be visually recognized through the first group, the target member is disposed at the first position, and the first member is arranged through the opening of the shielding member. While allowing the player to visually recognize the first pattern or pattern formed, the target member is displaced from the first position to the second position, so that the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player via the opening of the shielding member is displayed. , A second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

  In this case, since the target member is formed of a light transmissive material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or design visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation unit is not irradiated. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatably disposed on the base member around a center of the circular or annular shape as a rotation center. Gaming machine M4.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and can be rotated by the base member about the center of the circular or annular shape as a rotation center. As compared with the case where the target member can be slid and displaced, the arrangement of the target member while securing the number of patterns and designs to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member Required space can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material in a circular plate shape in a front view and is formed with a reflecting portion, and is configured to emit light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from a side end surface. The light irradiating means is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to a side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine M5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member around a center of the circular shape as a rotation center.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the target member is formed in a circular plate shape from a light transmissive material and is provided with a reflecting portion, and is illuminated from the light irradiating means and irradiated from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating the light from the light irradiating means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pattern or design displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. it can.

  The gaming machine M6, wherein in the gaming machine M5, the plurality of light irradiating units are circumferentially distributed at positions equidistant from a rotation center of the target member.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation units are circumferentially distributed at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( Irrespective of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member.

  The gaming machine M7, further comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member. Variations in the change of the irradiation mode can be increased. Therefore, the aspect visually recognized by the player can be further changed, and the player can be easily provided with interest.

  In the gaming machine M7, a driving unit is provided for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Wherein the gaming machine M8 is displaced together with the target member.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine M7, the driving member is provided with a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member. Since the member is abutted, it is displaced together with the target member, so that it can be used also as a driving means for displacing the target member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. it can.

  A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and The gaming machine K1 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and The gaming machine K2 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and The gaming machine K3 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
A game board having a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member; A gaming machine including a second member disposed on the back side of a board is known (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member.
The present technical concept has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of positioning a second member with respect to a first member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 includes a gaming board, a first member provided on a front side of the gaming board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member thereof. A second member having a second passage communicating with the first passage of the one member, and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board, wherein the first member engaging with the first member is provided. A third member having a mating portion and a second engaging portion engaging with the second member is provided.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, wherein the gaming board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member. Has an opening disposed in the internal space, and the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, wherein the third member is configured such that the first engaging portion is provided in a first passage of the first member, The joints are respectively engaged with the second passages of the second member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the second member can be positioned with respect to the first member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the product cost can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the gaming ball can be smoothly flowed down.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 60 base board (game board)
60a Through hole (opening)
64 1st Prize Winner (1st Passage)
100-104 Substrate box 140 Second winning opening (Entrance entrance, first entrance entrance)
65a Special winning opening (2nd entrance)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 Sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 cart member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 Projecting member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L Lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R Lower right rack (first or second member)
488b Drive pin (connecting pin)
491 second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base members 611, 5611, 6612 Back base (base member)
612, 5612 Front base (base member)
612g Holding pin (projection)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmitting member)
622, 6622 Reflecting parts 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641, 2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiating means)
652 Board member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 Insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Projecting portion 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (drive means)
940 Front unit (first unit, first unit)
941 back base (fixing member)
942c Second ball throwing part (part of first passage member , side wall part )
942c1 second concave notch (recess)
943 front base (body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member , rolling surface )
945 wing member (first opening / closing member)
945b Projection (projection part)
951 Plate member (second opening / closing member, opening / closing member)
953a1 opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Annular protrusion (seat)
954b recess (guide groove)
954c Projecting part (second guide means)
954c2 Side edge portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 Second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed part (passage member)
957a1 Body 957a2 Shaft (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third means)
961a Body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962b guide part (second engagement part)
962e arm part (second engagement part)
962f Wall (covering surface , arrangement part)
962g Projecting part (first engaging part)
140 Second winning opening (Entrance entrance, Second entrance entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotary member, part of first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Projection (second part)
965e insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Concave portion (receiving portion)
966b2 One side contacted part 966b3 Other side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 Second blade (part of cutting member)
6683 blade (part of cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second means, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall portion (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
981b1 projection (projection)
981c1 rolling surface 982b Inclined portion (bent portion)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (standing part)
985e1, 985f1 Inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 throwing path (part of the second path, second upstream path)
TR1 first passage (part of second passage, second branch passage)
TR2 second passage (part of second passage, second branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 wiring HS2 wiring HS3 wiring SP biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Collar (support wheel)
θ1 First drive range (outer range)
θ2 Second drive range (center side range)

Claims (2)

A game board, first means connected to the front of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage connected to the first passage of the first means, and a back surface of the game board And a second means connected to the game machine,
A third means is provided which has a first engaging portion which engages with the first means and a second engaging portion which engages with the second means, and which can position the second passage with respect to the first passage. ,
The first passage and the second passage have a rolling surface on which a game ball rolls, and a pair of side wall portions standing upright from an outer edge of the rolling surface in a direction orthogonal to a rolling direction of the rolling surface. Respectively,
At the end of the side wall portion of the first passage on the side of the second passage, a cutout is formed at a position separated from the rolling surface by a radius of the game ball in a direction away from the second passage. A recess is formed,
At the end of the side wall in the second passage on the side of the first passage, a projection protruding toward the first passage and disposed in the recess is formed.
The second engagement portion is connected between a pair of arms externally fitted to the outside of the pair of side walls of the second passage, and is connected between the arms. gaming machine according to claim Rukoto a placement portion which is disposed above the end of the second passage side of the rolling surface of the end portion and the first passage of the second passage side. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images